JP2022107801A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of fueling player's eagerness to play a game by enhancing the degree of attention to the game and the amusement of the game.

SOLUTION: In the game machine, when a user selects a music, an MPU outputs the selected music from a speaker. In a case where an unselected music other than musics already selected by the user is selected (step S2901: Yes) and a probability variation promotion performance is to be executed (step S2903 or S2905: Yes), the MPU causes a symbol display part and the speaker to execute a music selection button performance which suggests or clearly indicates a game state (step S2909).

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

Generally, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, a song selected by a player from a plurality of songs may be output as an effect during a jackpot game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-49375 A

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of interest in the game and the interest in the game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the level of interest in a game and the interest in the game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
production means (26, 341, etc.) including image display means (341) for executing production with images and audio output means (26) for executing production for outputting music;
A music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the sound output means (26) from a plurality of music, and based on the music selection image (83). production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26);
operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a song to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the song selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
with
The effect execution means (51) performs a music selection operation that suggests or indicates the game state on condition that the player performs a decision operation on the operation means (21) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the effects (suggestive effects 1 to 8, fixed effects 1 to 4) are executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.).

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of interest in a game and the amusement of the game, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of a game machine. FIG. 1 is a development diagram showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine. FIG. 1 is a development diagram showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine. The front view which shows an example of the game board of a game machine. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of a game machine. A block diagram showing an example of a memory area of a gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various tables used in a gaming machine; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a main timer interrupt process procedure executed in a gaming machine. A flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the starting winning process executed in the gaming machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a first pending command setting process executed by the game machine; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed in the gaming machine; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of game round control processing executed in the game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of data setting processing executed in the game machine; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of variation start processing executed in the gaming machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed in a game machine; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed in the gaming machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the gaming machine. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation statuses. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various tables used in a gaming machine; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various tables used in a gaming machine; A flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a jackpot game effect determination process executed in a gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect process executed in a gaming machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of music selection image display processing executed in the game machine. FIG. 10 is a view showing an example of a music selection image display screen on the symbol display section of the gaming machine; The figure which shows the example of a change of the provisional selection image in a music selection image. The figure which shows the example of a change of the provisional selection image in a music selection image. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of a temporary music selection image in the music selection image; The figure which shows an example of the music selection counter data table used with a game machine. A diagram showing an example of a selected music list table and a non-selected music list table used in a gaming machine. A diagram showing an example of an initial sequence data table for a plurality of songs used in a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the initial arrangement|sequence of a music selection image. FIG. 11 is a view showing an example of an initial music selection image display screen on the symbol display section of the gaming machine; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the initial arrangement of music selection images; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of an initial provisionally selected music piece determination process executed in a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the temporary selection music lottery table used with a game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of initial provisionally selected music output processing executed in the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used with a game machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of music selection processing executed in the game machine; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of temporarily selected music output processing executed by the game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of selected music output processing executed in the gaming machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of music selection button effect processing executed in the game machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing executed in the game machine. A diagram showing an example of a song selection button effect table used in a gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the 5R probability variable music selection button production lottery table used with a game machine. A diagram showing an example of a 5R probability variable music selection button effect lottery table determination table used in a game machine. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process executed in the gaming machine. A diagram showing an example of a 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table used in a game machine. A diagram showing an example of a 5R probability variable music selection button effect lottery table determination table used in a game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of music selection counter data update processing executed in the game machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various tables used in a gaming machine; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of game setting processing executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the pattern display part of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the pattern display part of a game machine. FIG. 10 is a view showing an example of transition of display screens in the symbol display section of the gaming machine; FIG. 10 is a view showing an example of transition of display screens in the symbol display section of the gaming machine; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a game start waiting process executed by the game machine; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of top menu screen processing executed by the gaming machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of game setting screen processing executed by the gaming machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of setting item selection processing executed in the game machine; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of melody pattern setting screen processing executed in the game machine; The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the pattern display part of a game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of music list display setting screen processing executed in the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the pattern display part of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the pattern display part of a game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of music selection button effect setting screen processing executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the pattern display part of a game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of setting history selection processing executed in the gaming machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of melody pattern setting history screen processing executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the pattern display part of a game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of music list display setting history screen processing executed in the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the pattern display part of a game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of music selection button effect history screen processing executed by the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the pattern display part of a game machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used with a game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of temporarily selected music output processing executed by the game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of selected music output processing executed in the gaming machine. The figure which shows an example of the melody pattern table used with a game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of temporarily selected music output processing executed by the game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of selected music output processing executed in the gaming machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of music selection button effect processing executed in the game machine. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of music selection button effect processing executed in the game machine.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION First to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings for better understanding of the present invention. Moreover, each of the following embodiments is an example that embodies the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 74. FIG.

[Schematic Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment shall be defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine. The present invention can also be applied to the game machine.

The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by being rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14 . Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported by the front frame 11 at its left end. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 at its left end.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determining section 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an electric decoration section 27, and the like. .

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the operation button 20 is pressed. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20 . The operation button 20 is used to reflect the intention of the player in the jackpot game effect in the later-described game cycle effect process (step S1709 in FIG. 15).

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position where the player can operate. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact type switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like, as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player.

Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player may be provided as operation means. Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided as operation means. Also, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the performance in the later-described game cycle performance processing (step S1709 in FIG. 15).

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player, and the player's pressing operation is performed in the music selection process (step S2220 in FIG. 23) and the game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 15) described later. Accept push button. The selection decision unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and decision buttons 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) displayed on the pattern display section 341, which will be described later, in the music selection process and the game setting process. It includes an upper selection button 211 , a lower selection button 212 , a left selection button 213 and a right selection button 214 . These selection buttons 211 to 214 are provided with operation switches 211a to 211d (see FIG. 5) for switching input signals to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the selection buttons 211 to 214 .

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. The enter button 21B also has an operation switch 21Ba for switching input signals to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the enter button 21B.

Also, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player may be provided as operation means. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, it is conceivable that the panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting the player's touch operation on the panel 25 are provided as operation means. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214).

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by shooting a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the shooting handle 22, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 (see FIG. 3) of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a line. It is used to lead to the game ball shooting mechanism 32 in an aligned state. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper plate 23 .

The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 (see FIG. 2) of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10 . As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the speaker 26 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11. The speaker 26 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11. 23), etc.). In addition, the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11 . In addition, the electric decoration section 27 incorporates a light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and performs a lamp effect according to a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking. Note that the speaker 26 is an example of the audio output means of the present invention, and constitutes the presentation means of the present invention.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
The inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33, as shown in FIGS. In FIG. 2, the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332 . In the gaming machine 10, various commands (control signals) for designating control contents are transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first operating opening 314, a second operating opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , a variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, and a main display section 37 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being shot from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315 or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. be done.

Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 includes a shooting rail 321, a ball feeder 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 is directed to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It guides. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is driving means for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10 , the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the game board 31 . In addition, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

Returning to the description of FIG. 4, openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction are formed in the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318. ing. And on the back side of the game board 31, corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected. Incoming ball sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided. Also, the through gate 317 is a gate through which game balls can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through gate 317 . In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball hits to the right.

The ball entry sensors 313 a to 317 a are electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and detection results of the ball entry sensors 313 a to 317 a are input to the main control unit 331 . Detecting the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a is hereinafter sometimes referred to as winning. The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be arbitrary sensors capable of individually detecting game ball entry by other detection methods.

Further, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not to restrict entry of game balls into the second operating port 315. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. Then, on the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second operating port 315, and the electric accessory 315b is closed to allow the game ball to enter the second operating port 315. ball is restricted.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 316b for switching whether or not the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 is restricted. The opening/closing door 316b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 . In the game board 31, the opening and closing door 316b is opened to allow game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening and closing door 316b restricts the entry of game balls to the variable winning opening 316. be.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first actuation opening 314 or the second actuation opening 315 is detected by the entry ball sensor 314a or the entry ball sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 determines whether a jackpot is drawn by lottery. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a “jackpot lottery”) is performed. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 37 according to the lottery result. Also, the lottery result of the big win by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 313, the first operating hole 314, the second operating hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316 is detected by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning hole 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first operating hole 314 or the second operating hole 315 is 3, and the ball enters the variable winning hole 316. The number of prize balls in this case is 15. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, the state shifts to a special game state, and the state in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times ( For example, 5 times, 16 times), a large amount of prize balls are paid out, and game value is given to the player.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. And, when the result of the success/failure determination is winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state (special game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state includes an open/close execution mode in which a round game is performed five times until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the variable winning opening 316. state. The 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a game state including an open/close execution mode in which round games are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the 5R jackpot game state. It is a game state.

The variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31 . The pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332 . Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and the game rotation effect display are performed according to the result of the big win lottery performed by the main control unit 331 according to the ball entering the upper operation port 314 or the lower operation port 315. Various displays are performed. It should be noted that the pattern display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention, and constitutes the rendering means of the present invention. Also, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display sections separately from the pattern display section 341 . The sub-display section is arranged, for example, in the upper portion, the lower portion, or the left portion or the right portion of the pattern display portion 341 . The sub display portion may be movable between a position covering the pattern display portion 341 and a position not covering the pattern display portion 341 . Also, the sub-display section may be arranged on the upper plate 23 . The sub-display section may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the pattern display section 341. FIG.

For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in the vertical or horizontal direction. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the main designs. Also, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341, the symbol variation display is executed so that all the main symbols stop varying. be. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols are varied along a preset variation direction (horizontal or vertical), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols is stopped in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbols on all the lines stops and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 ends, the symbol display section 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged on one or a plurality of active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol indicates or suggests the result of the big winning lottery by the main control unit 331 . For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``16R probability variable jackpot'' or ``5R normal jackpot'', a state in which the main patterns of the same pattern are lined up on the effective line is displayed, indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot. is specified. In addition, although the jackpot type may be indicated by the combination of main symbols on the activated line, it is not necessarily indicated. Specifically, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "16R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot among the main symbols, is lined up on the effective line. or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than "777" are lined up on the activated line. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", the state in which the symbol combination such as "333", which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating the 5R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, is lined up on the effective line. It is displayed, or a state in which the same symbol combination other than the symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot such as "777" or "333" or the symbol combination indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot is lined up on the activated line is displayed. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", a combination of patterns indicating a probability variable jackpot, such as "222" and "444", which are set in advance as a pattern combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main patterns. The state where the combination of the same pattern other than lined up on the active line is displayed. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "lost", a state in which different combinations of main symbols are lined up on the activated line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

In addition, in each game round, the symbol display section 341 displays a game round effect indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the big win lottery will be a big win along with the symbol variation display. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "16R probability variable jackpot", when a state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the main pattern combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, 5R is displayed as a game round production. A suggestion performance is executed to suggest that the probability variable jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is possible. In this case, in the game round performance or the jackpot game performance, a promotion performance or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is a 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variable jackpot", when the state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the main pattern combination indicating the probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, 5R is performed as a game round production. A suggestive effect that suggests a normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the game round performance or the jackpot game performance, a promotion performance or the like that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is a 5R probability variable jackpot is executed.

Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect and an ending effect. In this embodiment, a predetermined period of time (for example, from the start of the 1Rth round game in the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the 1Rth round game in the opening/closing execution mode) elapses in the symbol display section 341 from the start of execution of the opening/closing execution mode effect. Until then, a song selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) is displayed that enables selection of a song to be output from the speaker 26 as a jackpot game effect. Hereinafter, the period during which the music selection image 83 is displayed may be referred to as the music selection effective period. On the other hand, when the game spin effect or the jackpot game effect is not displayed (in the non-game state), the game setting image can be displayed by the player's operation of the operation button 20, and the selection can be made based on the game setting image. By operating the decision unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B), game settings can be made. Details of the song selection process (step S2220 in FIG. 23) in the jackpot game effect (jackpot game state) and the game setting process in the non-game state (step S1711 in FIG. 15) will be described later.

The magnet sensor 35 is provided in the vicinity of the operating section 310 and on the back side of the game board 31 . The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a game ball to the actuation unit 310, the fraud can be detected.

The radio wave sensor 36 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 around the first operating opening 314 and the second operating opening 315 . The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the detection sensor 314a or the detection sensor 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example. Also, the radio wave sensor 36 may be similarly provided around the special prize winning opening 319b.

The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371 arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374. FIG. The LED pair 371 is triggered by the winning of the through gate 317, and displays the result of the lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 by the lighting pattern. On the 7-segment display 372, the symbols are varied and displayed with the winning of the first operation port 314 as a trigger, and the symbols corresponding to the result of the big win lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. On the 7-segment display 373, the symbols are varied and displayed with the winning of the second operation port 315 as a trigger, and the symbols corresponding to the result of the big win lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the pending number N and the pending number M of the variable display caused by winning the first actuation opening 314 and the second actuation opening 315 are displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
The back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140, as shown in FIG.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23 . Incidentally, when the game balls on the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.例文帳に追加

The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power control device 9 (see FIG. 5). The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The shooting control device 8 controls the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 . The power control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to various control devices and various driving means provided in the gaming machine 10 . do.

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 is an example of main control means provided with the main control device 4 that executes the main control of the game in the gaming machine 10 . The main controller 4 executes a big win lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset big win gaming state. The main controller 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM411 and RAM412 are incorporated in MPU41. The MPU 41 executes various processes according to control programs stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs various signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4 . Also, the input/output I/F 42 is connected to the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, the main display section 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ball has entered the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. to judge. The MPU 41 also determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity using magnets or radio waves based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36 . Furthermore, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs various commands such as a variation pattern command, a reservation number command, a first reservation command, a second reservation command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command to the sound lamp control device 5. For example, the variation pattern command is a command indicating the result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time, and is stored in the later-described holding storage area 412b when the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 start the symbol variation display. It is determined based on the information received and output to the audio lamp control device 5 . When the number of holds N or the number of holds M stored in a hold storage area 412b, which will be described later, increases, the number of holds command is issued by the voice lamp control device 5 to notify the number of holds N or the number of holds M after the increase. output to The first hold command and the second hold command are output to the voice lamp control device 5 when the hold number N or the hold number M currently stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases, and the shift command is the hold number When N or the number of holds M decreases, it is output to the voice lamp control device 5 to notify the number of holds N or the number of holds M after the decrease. The jackpot start command is output to the sound lamp control device 5 when shifting to the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot end command is output to the sound lamp control device 5 when the jackpot game state ends. Various other commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41 . The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41 . Specifically, the execution cycle of main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 interrupts the main timer (to be described later) each time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the loading process is activated and executed. The oscillator circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply operation clocks for various control subjects in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 . Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 .

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit from which various types of information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for various processes executed by the MPU 41 . For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting various commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, an electrical configuration for the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses various counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412, the reservation storage area 412b, and the electric worker reservation area 412c to set the big winning lottery and the variable display time.

The lottery counter includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when judging the losing type. be In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display section 37 and the pattern display section 341. be Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the initial values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is to be in the open state are set. and a normal winning initial value counter CIN2 used for . Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will simply be abbreviated as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reserved storage area 412b comprises a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the type of game round displayed by the 7-segment display 372 in variable display and stop display may be referred to as a first special figure game. be. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reservation storage area REB, and the type of game round displayed by the 7-segment display 373 in variable display and stop display may be referred to as a second special figure game. be.

Then, when the game ball enters the first operation opening 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success/failure information used in the lottery, and stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. Further, when the game ball enters the second operation opening 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is It is acquired as right/wrong information used for right/wrong determination, and stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The winning information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as a winning information acquisition processing unit by executing processing according to the control program. In addition, corresponding to each of the first reservation storage area REA and the second reservation storage area REB, the lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variation type counter CS1, etc.) is individually may be provided in

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area of the first reservation storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reserved storage area REB.

Therefore, the jackpot in the game round executed based on the success/failure information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB In addition to judging whether or not the game is successful, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 .

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first operation port 314, the success or failure information is vacant in the order of priority of the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. stored in the area where In the reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 for which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number N.

Also, when the game ball enters the second operation port 315, the success/failure information is vacant in the order of priority of the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. stored in the area. In the reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 for which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 allow the first operation port 314 And it is possible to reserve up to four pieces of the winning/failing information as the winning history of the game ball to the second operation port 315, respectively.

It should be noted that it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the first working port 314 and the second working port 315 are provided with a maximum number of reserved areas of eight in common. It is possible to reserve the winning/failing information as a winning history. The processing for storing the winning/failing information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as a holding processing unit by executing processing according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move each value of the success/failure information stored in the . Specifically, each value in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and each value does not exist in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB. When the pending number storage area NAB is 0, each value in the first pending area REA1 of the first pending storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA and the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the second pending storage area REB is 2 or more. , it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the holding area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the values in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the values in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one game round, the MPU 41 performs a big winning lottery based on various numerical information stored as win/fail information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/failure information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and is transferred to the third reservation area REA1. The success/failure information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the win/fail information stored in the second reservation area REB2 is shifted to the first reservation area REB1, and is transferred to the third reservation area REB1. The success/failure information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the success/failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 738, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315.例文帳に追加

The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is determined by the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area in the ROM 411, which is a low-probability mode (first game state) that is a normal game state and a high-probability mode (second game state) that is a variable game state. state) are set. Here, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B), the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is two (373, 727), and the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot in the high probability mode is The number is 13 (59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 373, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 727). Here, in the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, the two random numbers (373, 727) for winning the jackpot are common, but it is conceivable that they are not common. If the value of the big win random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers for winning the big win, the result of the big win lottery is lost.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315.例文帳に追加In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of two types of jackpots, variable probability jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example of the sorting table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (C), when the type of game round is the first special game, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers to be the 16R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that usually become a 5R jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the game round is the second special game, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 5, 0 to 4, and the number of random numbers to be the 16R probability variable jackpot is 10, 5 to 14. There are 5 random numbers from 15 to 19, which are usually the 5R jackpots. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop variable machine in which the probability of the variable jackpot in the first special game and the second special game is the same. Also, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special game is set higher than in the first special game. That is, in the probability variable time-saving gaming state, compared to the normal gaming state such as the normal time-saving gaming state and the normal non-time-saving gaming state, the winning expectation value of the game ball when the result of the winning judgment in the jackpot lottery is won is high. is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first operating port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special game by the winning of the game ball, and the second operating port 315 that triggers the execution of the second special game by the winning of the game ball An individual distribution table is set in , and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball has won the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315, but the first special game and It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same as the second special figure game. In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two type mixing machine, or the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the results of the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", and "5R normal jackpot". , and "off".

Here, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot, the open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable prize winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the machine shifts to a probability variable short time mode which is a high-probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening an electric accessory 315b. Then, the variable probability time saving mode continues until the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R variable probability jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the game is executed in the normal short-time mode, which is a low-probability mode with a low probability of winning the jackpot and a high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. The high-frequency support mode in the normal time-saving mode continues until a preset number of times, for example, 50 times or 100 times, the jackpot lottery ends.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop variable machine, after the jackpot game at the time of the variable probability big hit is completed, a preset number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) of the jackpot A lottery is executed in a probability variable time-saving mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), then shifts to a low probability mode, and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also possible to perform a falling lottery from the probability variable time saving mode to the normal time saving mode or the low probability mode in each game round as another embodiment. In addition, when the jackpot lottery result is lost, the jackpot game state and the high-frequency support mode are not entered. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three kinds of jackpot types, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types, such as Round Regular Jackpot, 16R Regular Jackpot.

Also, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the result of the big win lottery is a loss. Specifically, according to the loss type table stored in the loss type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol shifts to the front and back of the reach symbol by one and stops. The value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is set for each of three kinds of loss types, namely, the ready-to-win except before and after the final stop pattern stops before and after the ready-to-win pattern, and the complete loss in which the ready-to-win does not occur. Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the exclusion type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (D), the value of the random number that becomes the front and back reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that becomes the reach other than the front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that becomes complete deviation is 39. ~238. In addition, the MPU 41 determines that the reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, in the game times in which the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

Here, the ready-to-win state is a variable state in which a state in which a jackpot is likely to be won is indicated during the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 to the stop display of the symbols. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a story production process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. A person-participation type operation rendering process and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden or displayed in a reduced size during execution of these rendering processes.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric role product 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. For example, when the electric accessory open counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is possible to win, and when the electric accessory open counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is possible to lose.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 determines rough fluctuation types such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, or an off variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411 . Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for each of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIG. 7(E), FIG. 7(F), and FIG. 7(G) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, and a loss fluctuation table. As shown in FIG. 7 (E), FIG. 7 (F), and FIG. 7 (G), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, and the outlier fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated in advance. Then, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot fluctuation table, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot" or "16R probability variable jackpot", the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, and when the lottery result is "off" , refer to the respective deviation fluctuation tables to specify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 7 (E) and 7 (F), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern "01" to "03" according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected. Here, when the variation pattern "01" is selected, in the symbol display section 341, the variation display is performed in the normal ready-to-win mode with the variation display time of 30 seconds. Further, when the variation pattern “02” is selected, the symbol display section 341 performs variation display in a super ready-to-win mode with a variation display time of 60 seconds. Furthermore, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the symbol display section 341 executes the variation display in the special ready-to-win mode with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds. Note that the types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to these. Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

For example, in the game machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach with different characters or stories are prepared as the normal reach corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and one of the normal reach selected from them is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and one of the selected super reach is executed. be. Super reach has a longer fluctuation time than normal reach and a shorter fluctuation time than special reach. Executed when suggesting

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the special reach corresponding to the variation pattern "03", and one of the special reach selected from among them is executed. be. The special reach is a reach with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach and the super reach, and includes, for example, a production that develops from the normal reach or the super reach.

Note that reach corresponding to various variation patterns includes a single operation effect in which a single operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, and a repeated operation effect in which the repeated operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. , and a player-participating type operation effect process such as a long-press operation effect in which the long-press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7 (G), in the loss fluctuation table, for each stop type at the time of loss determined by the value of the reach random number counter C 3 A correspondence relationship between the counter CS1 and the variation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front-rear out-of-reach reach or front-rear out-of-rear reach, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of deviation is complete deviation, either variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs a variation display with a variation display time of 7 seconds without reach. Further, when the variation pattern “05” is selected, the symbol display section 341 performs a variation display with a variation display time of 10 seconds without reach.

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of failure corresponding to the variation pattern "04", the variation display is stopped without a notice effect in which a character, a message, etc. are displayed. is executed. In addition, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of failure corresponding to the variation pattern "05", there is a variation display of the failure pattern in which the variation display is stopped with a symbol, accompanied by an advance notice effect in which a character, a message, etc. are displayed. executed. Also, when the variation display at the time of loss corresponding to the variation pattern “05” is performed, a player-participation-type advance notice display reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display section 37 and the pattern display section 341, the MPU 41 sends a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result to the sound lamp control device. Enter 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 issues a variation pattern command " A01” to “A03” are output. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern command "B01" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03" to output one of "B03". Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern command "C01" with "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03". to output one of "C03". In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 provides variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" with "D" indicating failure in front of the variation patterns "01" to "05". output either As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the lottery result and the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation pattern command. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in . Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variable mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. Let

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 performs a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and various variation tables for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. will be executed. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. In addition, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5 , the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on control signals input from the main control unit 331, the symbol display section 341 displays and It is an example of the sub-control means that executes the effect display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM511 and RAM512 are incorporated in MPU51.

A ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp lighting patterns used in various effects. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit from which various types of information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for various processes executed by the MPU 51 . Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, thereby controlling the display control device 6 based on various commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4. A command (control signal) is input to to control the display of the symbol display section 341 . In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display part 341 . For example, the MPU 51 displays the symbol display unit 341, reproduces sound output from the speaker 26, and the illumination unit 27 lighting mode is controlled. In one example, the MPU 51 outputs music from the speaker 26 and displays a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) on the pattern display section 341 in the jackpot game effect.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs various signals to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52 . Various commands such as a variation pattern command, a pending number command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are input from the main controller 4 to the sound lamp controller 5 . The audio lamp control device 5 also outputs a display variation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6 . A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives various commands from the main control device 4 and inputs the various commands to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. A configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination part 27 based on various commands input from the main control device 4. is. Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the operation switch 20, the upper selection operation switch 211a, the lower selection operation switch 211b, the left selection operation switch 211c, the right selection operation switch 211d, and the decision operation switch 21Ba. As a result, the MPU 51 controls the sound output from the speaker 26 and the lighting mode of the illumination part 27 based on the operation of the operation button 20, the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214), and the decision button 21B. is also possible.

The MPU 51 is based on various commands such as a variation pattern command, a number of reservations command, a first reservation command, a second reservation command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command, which are input from the main control device 4. Execute arithmetic operations.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 generates a variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 20(B)), and production based on the variation pattern command. The type (see FIGS. 21 (A) to (C))) is determined (see steps S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 19), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6, and the pattern display unit The symbol variation display at 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a failure, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the failure is displayed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command indicates a 5R normal jackpot, a combination of main patterns corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when it indicates a 5R probability variable jackpot, a combination of main patterns corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variable jackpot. is displayed, and when the 16R probability variable jackpot is indicated, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 based on various commands (control signals) input from the audio lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5 to execute the symbol variation display and effect display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62 , and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5 and the pattern display section 341 . Two-way communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 .

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612 . The display control device 6 also incorporates various circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes various processes according to control programs stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to various control programs, the ROM 611 stores variable symbols such as the main symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, advance notice effect images, reach effect images, jackpot effect images, loss effect images, and jackpot game effects. A plurality of types of images such as an opening effect image, an opening/closing execution effect image, an ending effect image, a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25), a top menu image used for game settings, and various setting images developed from the top menu image are stored. there is Each image displayed on the pattern display section 341 includes a still image or a moving image. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used, the display timing of each image, and the variable display time of the variable pattern. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display various images in accordance with the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing variable symbol display and effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit from which various types of information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for various processes executed by the MPU 61 . Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 .

A ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which various control programs and various parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various types of information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for various processes executed by the MPU 71 . Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs various signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7 . Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 .

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not game balls are paid out, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting a game ball to be put out is provided. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the driving section 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Also, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73 . The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball jamming (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed on an island facility together with the game machine 10.例文帳に追加The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to put out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to the effect that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to release a predetermined number of game balls. be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Also, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32 . Specifically, the shooting control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 while the shooting handle 22 is being rotated, thereby moving the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the shooting rail 321. feed above. The shooting control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the shooting handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby directing the game ball on the shooting rail 321 toward the game board 31. to fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a driving signal. As a result, the game machine 10 shoots one game ball toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Also, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and voltage is input to the shooting control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 . As a result, the shooting control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 22, increases the shooting intensity of the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 22 increases. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the shooting handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and a ball stopping switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop shooting the game ball. is provided. The shooting control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, and when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the shooting handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and the game is prevented from being played in a situation where the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 . Further, the player can stop the shooting of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing while rotating the shooting handle 22.例文帳に追加

[Power supply control device 9]
The power control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors and driving units, a +5V voltage for logic used in various control devices, and the like. The power control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to its initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated with the RAM erase switch 91 turned on to turn on the power.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the information in the RAMs provided in the various control devices is held for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitors. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, various control devices can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period.

Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply has been cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power failure occurs when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge. In addition, when the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power failure signal from the power control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 8 to 14. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed when a power failure occurs. Execute NMI interrupt processing and the like. Incidentally, in this embodiment, explanations of the start-up processing and the NMI interrupt processing are omitted.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
Here, FIG. 8 is a flow chart for explaining an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 . The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S<b>1001 , the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining detection states of various sensors or switches connected to the main controller 4 . For example, the detection states of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, and the radio wave sensor 36 are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball to any of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a is detected.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reach the maximum value. If so, clear the counter value to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes start winning processing (described later) associated with the winning of the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 (step S1004), and executes firing control processing (step S1005).

The shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the shooting handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process that enables firing. Further, in the shooting control process, when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated, shooting of the game ball is disabled. It is a process to make The MPU 41 instructs the shooting control device 8 to shoot the game ball when the shooting of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery for whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is to be in the electric role open state based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency mode flag. Then, when the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol is won when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and it is lost when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 30 to 250. We judge that it is. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol is won when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and it is lost when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 200 to 250. We judge that it is. Then, when the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol winning is determined in the through gate process, the electric accessary 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second operation port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessories 315b are arranged side by side.

[Start-up winning process of main controller 4]
Here, the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S<b>1101 , the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first operating port 314 . Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the first operation opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and determines that the game ball has not entered the first operation opening 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 8, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 11 and S1309) are stored in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the success/failure information before the success/failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes a determination target for the success/failure of the jackpot in the variation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 12) described later. , the first pending command setting process for setting the first pending command is executed based on the confirmation result. Details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the second operation opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and determines that the game ball has not entered the second operation opening 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the starting winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. It is stored in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB in the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the success/failure information before the success/failure information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a determination target of the success/failure of the jackpot in the variation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 12) described later. Then, the second pending command setting process for setting the second pending command is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second pending command setting process is the same as the first pending command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 10, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second pending command setting process, in the first pending command setting process of FIG. good.

[First pending command setting process of main controller 4]
Here, the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or out), variation pattern and information such as the number of pending N .

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the number of reservations N from the number of reservations storage area NAA of the first reservation storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first reservation from the RAM412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202 : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether the high-probability mode is set based on a high-probability mode flag that can be set to ON in the later-described game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11). The high-probability mode flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 when transitioning to the high-probability mode, and is set to OFF when transitioning to the low-probability mode.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot election, based on the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7B). Execute pass/fail judgment. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning, based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7A). Execute the suitability judgment.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the read value is not a value corresponding to winning the jackpot (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, MPU41 reads the value of big hit classification counter C2 and fluctuation classification counter CS1 from RAM412. For example, when the success/failure information is stored in the third reservation storage area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. is read out. Of the first reservation storage area RE1 to the fourth reservation storage area RE4, the reservation area in which the success/failure information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 9 is determined by the value of the reservation number N stored in the reservation number storage area NA. It is possible.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the number of holds N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold number N contained in the first hold command. By referring to the number N, it is possible to recognize which of the first pending storage area RE1 to the fourth pending storage area RE4 the first pending command corresponds to the right/fail information stored. .

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result is out, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command (step S1209).

Note that the first pending command set to ON in the first pending command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 in step S1301 of the main process (see FIG. 11), which will be described later. is sent to the audio lamp controller 5 along with other commands in , and then cleared. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the sound lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 11 . Main control processing of the game is executed in the main processing. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1306 are executed as regular processes, for example, at a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of steps S1307 to S1309 is executed in the remaining time.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 performs external output processing for transmitting output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing or the previous main processing to each control device such as the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. to run. For example, when various commands such as a variation pattern command, a reservation number command, a first reservation command, a second reservation command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, and a jackpot end command are set in the RAM 413, the sub-control unit 332 send that command to 8, it is determined whether or not the winning detection information is stored in the RAM 413, and if the winning detection information is stored in the RAM 413, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7. FIG.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7. FIG. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 413, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred at the general winning opening 313 or the like. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round. The game round control process will be described later. In the game round control process, the above-described jackpot lottery is executed, and a variation pattern command necessary for symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. A variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set based on each value of .

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery (see step S1604 in FIG. 14). In the game state transition process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 changes the game state to a jackpot game state including an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high frequency game state. The normal non-time-saving game state, which is a support mode, and the normal non-time-saving game state, which is a low-probability mode and is not a high-frequency support mode, are shifted to.

For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state after the game round for the jackpot ends, and executes the jackpot game including the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or the 5R normal jackpot flag set to ON in steps S1607, S1608 or S1609 of FIG. The game state is shifted to the big win game state after the game round for the big win is finished. Then, in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 opens the opening and closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316, and when the maximum opening time of the opening and closing door 316b of the variable winning opening 316 elapses, or when the variable winning opening 316 When a predetermined upper limit number of prizes are won, one round of opening/closing processing for closing the opening/closing door 316b of the variable prize winning port 316 is repeatedly executed 5 times or 16 times according to the jackpot type.

Further, after executing the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the jackpot game state to the variable probability short-time game state when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, and the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot. In this case, the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to the normal time-saving game state.

Further, when the game state is changed, the MPU 41 sets ON a flag corresponding to the game state after the change. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high-probability mode flag to ON when the game state is shifted to the probability variable time-saving gaming state, and sets the time-saving mode flag to ON when the game state is normally shifted to the time-saving gaming state. do. In addition, when the time saving mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets the number of times of time saving (50 times or 100 times, etc.) preset as the number of times of execution of game rounds in the time saving mode to the time saving counter.

<Step S1306>
In step S<b>1306 , the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the main display section 37 . By this display control processing, the 7-segment display devices 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 execute the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is the main symbol indicating the lottery result. combination will stop. Further, by the display control process, the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37 executes the symbol variation display only during the predetermined normal symbol variation display time, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won. will stop. Incidentally, in the case of normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b associated with the second operating port 315 is opened only for a predetermined time.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and the above-described processes after S1301 are executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1307: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time, steps S1307, S1308, and S1309 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1307: Yes).

<Step S1308>
At step S1308, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1307.

[Game spin control process]
Here, the game round control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1304 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the middle of a big win game, and if it is in the middle of a big win game (step S1401: Yes), the game round control process is terminated, and the big win game is not in progress. If so (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. For example, whether or not the big win game is executed is determined based on the big win game execution flag which the MPU 41 sets to ON at the start of the big win game and turns OFF at the end of the big win game. Further, when the big win game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big win game, the MPU 41 sets a big win game start command and transmits this big win game start command to the sound lamp control device 5 . On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command and transmits the jackpot game end command to the sound lamp control device 5 .

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1407. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON at step S1614 (see FIG. 14) of the variation start process described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), it is turned off at step S1405. is determined based on the variable display flag set to .

<Step S1403>
At step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. However, if it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the game round control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has passed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the combination of the main symbols according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the game round on the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37. is displayed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405). When the process of step S1405 is finished, the MPU 41 finishes the game round control process.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 determines whether both the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the pending storage area 412b and the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB are 0. do. Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the game round control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the win/fail information data stored in the reservation storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes variation start processing for causing the symbol display section 341 to perform variation display based on the winning/failure information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the game round control processing. Details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of data setting processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number M of reservations corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. do. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1505, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No).

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves the success/failure information from the first pending area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success/failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success/failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The success/failure information is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 moves when the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 moves when both or one of the pending number M and the pending number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: Yes). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the right/fail information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved. The success/failure information is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508 and Step S1509>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 determines whether the time saving mode flag that can be set to ON in the gaming state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) is set to ON, and the time saving mode flag is set to ON. If so (step S1508: Yes), the counter value of the time saving counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1509). On the other hand, MPU41 complete|finishes the said data setting process, when the time saving mode flag is not set to ON (step S1508: No).

<Steps S1510 and S1511>
In step S1510, MPU41 judges whether the value of a time saving counter is 0 (step S1510). Here, when the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving mode flag to off (step S1511), and when the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (step S1510: No), The data setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, an example of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag that can be set to ON in the game state transition process (step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 11) is set to ON (step S1601), and the high probability mode flag is ON. (step S1601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1602, and if the high probability mode flag is not set to ON (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, based on the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7B), the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the success/failure information currently stored in the execution area AE corresponds to winning the jackpot. Execute the validity judgment whether it is a value or not. On the other hand, in step S1603, based on the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7A), the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the success/failure information currently stored in the execution area AE indicates that the jackpot is won. Executes the validity judgment as to whether or not the values are corresponding values.

<Steps S1604 to S1610>
At step S1604, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the success/failure determination at step S1602 or S1603 is a big hit. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination is a jackpot (step S1604: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (steps S1605 and S1606). Specifically, the MPU 41, based on the jackpot type counter C2 included in the win/fail information currently stored in the execution area AE and the distribution table (see FIG. 7(C)), the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot. Whether it is (step S1605), it is determined whether it is a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S1606).

When the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot (step S1605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON (step S1607). The 5R probability variable jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the winning/failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 5R probability variable jackpot. In addition, in step S1607, the stop result of the main display section 37 in the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot is also set based on the hit/fail information. It should be noted that the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF at the end of the variation start process. Moreover, when the process of step S1607 is complete|finished, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1611.

When the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON (step S1608). The 16R probability variable jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the winning/failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 16R probability variable jackpot. Further, in step S1608, the stop result of the main display section 37 in the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variable jackpot is also set based on the winning/failing information. It should be noted that the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF at the end of the variation start process. Moreover, when the process of step S1608 is complete|finished, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1611.

When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: No), the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag provided in the RAM 412 to ON (step S1609). The 5R normal jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the winning/failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is the 5R normal jackpot. Further, in step S1609, the stop result of the main display section 37 in the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot is also set based on the winning/failing information. It should be noted that the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF at the end of the variation start process. Moreover, when the process of step S1609 is complete|finished, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1611.

On the other hand, if the result of the win/loss determination is not a big hit (step S1604: No), the MPU 41 sets the loss flag to ON (step S1610). The loss flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the winning/failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a loss. In addition, in step S1610, the stop result of the main display section 37 in the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss is also set based on the winning/failing information. Note that the deviation flag is set to OFF at the end of the fluctuation start process. Moreover, when the process of step S1610 is complete|finished, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1611.

<Step S1611>
In step S1611, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display section 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the game cycle to the variable display time counter. Concretely, when the normal jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 7(E)). In addition, when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 7(F)). Furthermore, when the deviation flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the deviation variation table (see FIG. 7(G)).

<Step S1612>
In step S1612, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round and the variation pattern specified in step S1611, and stores it in the RAM512. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 11) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 5, and the audio ramp control device 5 displays the pattern based on the variation pattern command. Symbol variation display by the unit 341 and the like are executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "A" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that the 5R normal jackpot is "A01" to " A03” is set as the variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "B01" to "B03" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot to the variation patterns "01" to "03". is set as a variation pattern. Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" with "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot to the variation patterns "01" to "03". is set as a variation pattern. Further, when the lottery result is "losing", the MPU 41 selects one of the fluctuation patterns "D01" to "D08" with "D" indicating that the fluctuation pattern is "losing" to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "08". Set as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "losing", the MPU 41 causes the variation pattern command to include information as to whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach, or a complete loss.

<Steps S1613 and S1614>
The MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display section 37 (step S1613), and sets the variation display flag to ON (step S1614). The symbol variation display started here stops after the variation display time set in step S1611 has elapsed, in the state of the stop result set in any one of steps S1607 to S1610.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 74. FIG.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 . In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when starting up the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. Description of these processes is omitted.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the secondary timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S1701), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1702), selection button operation detection processing (step S1703), selection operation detection. Pattern determination processing (step S1704), determination button operation detection processing (step S1705), determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1706), counter update processing (step S1707), command determination processing (step S1708), game round effect processing ( Step S1709), jackpot game effect processing (step S1710), and game setting processing (step S1711) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the operation history for the past three times is sequentially updated. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 51 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Also, in step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. After that, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S1801 to S1803, the operation state of the operation button 20 for the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals is set to the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the operation state immediately before is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two times before is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation button detection pattern judgment processing]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation button detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button detection pattern determination process, an operation for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set pattern flags. The operation pattern flags are composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 18A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued. Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has been started. Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1902, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), the process proceeds to step S1902. The process moves to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1903, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the process proceeds to step S1903. The process moves to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1904, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No), the process is continued. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 18(A)). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 continues.

<Step S1905>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1901 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S1901: No), it checks whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. It judges (step S1905). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1906, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No), the process proceeds to step S1906. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1907, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No), the process proceeds to step S1907. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and the first operation pattern flag is set to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 18(A)). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S1908>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1902 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S1902: No), it determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on. (Step S1908). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1910, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 18(A)). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of the operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 18A). Note that the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Selection button operation detection process]
In the selection button operation detection process (step S1703 in FIG. 15), the MPU 51 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the upper selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 16 should be replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag".

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the down selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operating state of the down selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the down selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the down selection button operation processing, in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 16, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "down selection operation detection flag".

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the left selection button operation processing, in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 16, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "left selection operation detection flag".

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 16 should be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag".

[Selection operation detection pattern determination process]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S1704 in FIG. 15), the MPU 51 performs up selection operation detection pattern determination processing, down selection operation detection pattern determination processing, left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, and right selection operation detection pattern determination processing. Run.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the up-selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the up-selection operation detection flag based on the first up-selection operation detection flag, the second up-selection operation detection flag, and the third up-selection operation detection flag. An up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is such that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

In addition, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 51 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1st upper selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 51 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1st upper selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). used.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 51 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the down selection button from the operation history of the down selection button 212 determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the downward selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, detailed description thereof will be omitted. 17, the "operation detection flag" is changed to the "down selection operation detection flag", and the "operation pattern flag" is changed to the "down selection operation pattern". You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18(C), in the downward selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the downward selection button 212 three times. When it occurs, the first bottom selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second bottom selection operation pattern flag and the third bottom selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operating state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 51 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). used.

The MPU 51 also sets the first to third bottom selection operation detection flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the bottom selection button 212 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 51 determines that the bottom selection button 212 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third bottom selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 17, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is such that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 has three operation states of "ON", "ON", and "ON". When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Further, the MPU 51 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 51 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended). used.

In addition, the MPU 51 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when operation patterns other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the left selection button 213. to off. Note that the MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 17, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is such that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 18E, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of right selection button 214 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 51 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 51 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). used.

In addition, the MPU 51 sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when operation patterns other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the right selection button 214. to off. Note that the MPU 51 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[OK button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B, and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the enter button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 16, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the enter button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 16 should be replaced with the "enter button operation detection flag".

[Determination operation detection pattern determination process]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the operation state of the determination button 21B from the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. Set the operation pattern flag for determining Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 17, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 17 may be read as the “determination operation detection flag”.

Here, as shown in FIG. 18(F), in the enter operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" has occurred as the operating state of the enter button 21B three times. , the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B is being operated.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the enter button 21B three times, the MPU 51 sets the second enter operation pattern flag to ON, The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second enter operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the enter button 21B has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated). .

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the enter button 21B three times, the MPU 51 sets the third enter operation pattern flag to ON, The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third enter operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the enter button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the enter button 21B has ended). .

Further, the MPU 51 sets all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times. to off. Note that the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third enter operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update process]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 15, in the counter update process (step S1707), the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter and the variation display counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-100. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, the fact that variation is in progress, the end of the variation display of the pattern display section 341, and the like. In this embodiment, for example, the variation display counter determines whether or not the variation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53A) in which the variation display of the main symbol in the symbol display section 341 is stopped in step S3401 of FIG. If so, it is referred to when determining whether or not the variable display of the main symbol has started in the symbol display section 341 in step S3501 of FIG. 57, step S3601 of FIG.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process (step S1708 in FIG. 15). In the command determination process, a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S2001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2002. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2001: No), it ends the command determination process. Commands received from main controller 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not a command has been received. Note that the commands stored in the unprocessed command storage area are deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2001 and is subject to processing. remembered.

<Step S2002>
In step S2002, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2002: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2003, and if the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2002: No), the process proceeds to step S2006.

<Step S2003>
In step S2003, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbols, variation type and effect type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 20(A)) stored in advance in the ROM 511, a variation type table (see FIG. 20(B)) and an effect type table ( 21(A) to 21(C)) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512, the variation pattern is determined. Moreover, MPU51 sets the big-hit flag according to a big-hit classification to ON, when the information regarding a big-hit classification is contained in a variation pattern command. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to ON. is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that The production type table includes a normal reach production table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 21A), a super reach production table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 21B), and a special reach production table corresponding to special reach ( (see FIG. 21(C)).

Here, FIG. 20A is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 20(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, FIG. 20(A) shows that the main symbols are "1" to "9", and the symbol combination indicating that "333" is a definite variable jackpot (either 5R definite variable jackpot or 16R definite variable jackpot), "777 ” is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the double eyes other than “333” and “777” are either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbols, and the first stop symbols are selected with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``7'' is not sorted as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than ``7''. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stop-displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "333" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variable big win", double symbol combinations other than "333" whose main symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal big win can be stop-displayed. Then, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', when the main symbols other than ``3'' excluding ``7'' are determined as the first stop symbols, the MPU 51 sets the first promotion performance flag to ON. . The first promotion effect flag is referred to when judging whether or not to execute the 5R probability variation promotion effect that indicates that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot in a state suggesting that it is a 5R normal jackpot (jackpot in FIG. 22 Step S2103 in the game effect determination process, Step S2501 in the initial provisionally selected music output process in FIG. 37, Step S2701 in the provisionally selected music output process in FIG. 40, Step S2803 in the selected music output process in FIG. 41, etc.).

Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16 probability variable jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main patterns of "1" to "9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the main patterns of "1" to "9" Design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the stop display result of the main symbol is a symbol combination other than "777" which suggests 5R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot. can be Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot" and "3" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the second promotion effect flag to ON and "3" as the first stop symbol. And when a main symbol other than "7" is determined, the MPU 51 sets the third promotion effect flag to ON. The second promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the 16R promotion effect indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in a state suggesting that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot (Fig. 22 jackpot game step S2106 in effect determination processing, step S2501 in initial provisionally selected music output processing in FIG. 37, step S2701 in provisionally selected music output processing in FIG. 40, step S2803 in selected music output processing in FIG. 41, etc.). The third promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the 16R probability variation promotion effect that indicates that the 16R probability variation jackpot is executed in a state suggesting that it is a 5R normal jackpot (jackpot in FIG. 22 Step S2109 in the game effect determination process, Step S2501 in the initial provisionally selected music output process in FIG. 37, Step S2701 in the provisionally selected music output process in FIG. 40, Step S2803 in the selected music output process in FIG. 41, etc.).

Then, when the lottery result is a big hit and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stop-displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the game round is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "out", all the main symbols "1" to "9" are sorted, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "losing", the losing type selected based on the losing type table (FIG. 7(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol A second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the outlier type is front and rear outreach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the out-of-order type is a ready-to-win other than front-rear out-of-order, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the above-mentioned loss type is complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The combination of main symbols and stop symbols may be determined by the display control device 6. Only the first stop symbols are determined by the sound ramp control device 5, and the second stop symbols and the final stop symbols are determined by the display control device 6. may decide.

Also, FIG. 20B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 20B, the variation type table defines the variation display time and the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, a variation pattern command "A01" with a lottery result of "normal jackpot" and a variation pattern of "01" is associated with a variation display time of "30 s" and a variation type of "normal reach". In addition, the variation pattern command "B02" with the lottery result "5R probability variable jackpot" and the variation pattern "02" is associated with the variation display time "60 s" and the variation type "super reach". A variation pattern command "C03" with a result of "16 probable variable jackpot" and a variation pattern of "03" is associated with a variation display time of "90 s" and a variation type of "special reach". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" with the lottery result "out" and the variation pattern "04" is associated with the variation display time "7 s" and the variation type "no reach", and the lottery result is The variation pattern command "D05" which is "off" and whose variation pattern is "05" is associated with the variation display time "10 s" and the variation type "no reach".

Further, FIGS. 21A to 21C are diagrams showing examples of effect type tables. The effect type table is defined for each variation type. FIG. 21(A) is a normal reach effect table when the variation type is normal reach, FIG. 21(B) is a super reach effect table when the variation type is super reach, and FIG. It is a special reach production table when the variation type is special reach. In the present embodiment, a case in which there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but the number of types of effects may be six or more. Also, in FIG. 21, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect table shown in FIG. 21 (A), according to the lottery results (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss), the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter "Production X1" ~ "Production X5" is defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is the normal reach, it selects the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the normal reach effect table according to the lottery result.

Further, in the super ready-to-win effect table shown in FIG. 21(B), "effect Y1" to "effect Y5" are determined as effect types corresponding to the value of the effect type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is super ready-to-win, it selects the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the super ready-to-win effect table according to the lottery result.

Further, in the special ready-to-win effect table shown in FIG. 21(C), "effect Z1" to "effect Z5" are determined as effect types corresponding to the value of the effect type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is the special ready-to-win, it selects the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect type counter from the special ready-to-win effect table according to the lottery result.

Then, the MPU 51 sets a display variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern command, a variation type table, an effect type table and an effect type counter, a stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined based on the effect type table, and an effect type, and stores it in the RAM 512. Memorize. This display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2005, which will be described later. On the other hand, the display control device 6 that has received the display variation pattern command executes the symbol variation display and effect display using the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command. The display variation pattern command may include information as to whether or not the jackpot has been won.

<Step S2004>
In step S2004, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command to the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process (step S1707) of FIG. It is possible to judge For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2005>
In step S2005, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols in the symbol display unit 341, the variation type, and the effect type, and terminates the command determination process. Let The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols, the variation type, and the effect type determined in step S2003. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image of the main symbol and the effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and displays a plurality of main symbols. The main pattern fluctuations are stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the big win lottery is displayed, the symbol variation display of the next game cycle or the process corresponding to the big win game is executed. Here, during the variable display of the main symbols, various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type and the effect type specified by the display variation pattern command are executed.

<Step S2006>
In step S2006, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 sets the jackpot game execution flag to ON at the start of the jackpot game as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2006: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2007, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2006: No), the process to step S2009.

<Step S2007>
When the jackpot game start command is received, the MPU 51 executes jackpot game effect determination processing (step S2007). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining the effect to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON. The jackpot game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 23 described later (step S2201).

<Step S2009>
In step S2009, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set when the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 turns off the jackpot game execution flag at the end of the jackpot game as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2009: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2010, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2009: No), the process to step S2011.

<Step S2010>
In step S2010, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON, for example, in step S2013, which will be described later, and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. (step S2216).

<Step S2011>
In step S2011, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a pending command. The pending commands include the first pending command and the second pending command as described above. The first pending command includes information specifying the jackpot type or loss, the variation pattern, and the pending number N of the variable display caused by winning the first operation port 314 . The second pending command includes information specifying the jackpot type or loss, the variation pattern, and the pending number M of the variable display caused by winning the second operation port 315 . Here, if the received command is a hold command (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2012, and if the received command is not a hold command (step S2011: No), the process goes to step S2013. Transition.

<Step S2012>
In step S2012, when the received pending command is the first pending command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or loss, variation pattern, pending number N, etc. specified by the first pending command in the variation type area of the RAM 512. . Similarly, when the received pending command is the second pending command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or loss, variation pattern, pending number M, etc. specified by the second pending command in the variation type area of the RAM 512 .

<Step S2013>
In step S2013, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main controller 4, and then terminates the command determination processing. For example, the MPU 51 sets the opening/closing execution mode start flag to ON when the opening/closing execution mode start command is received, and sets the opening/closing execution mode end flag to ON when the opening/closing execution mode end command is received. It should be noted that the opening/closing execution mode start flag is referred to when judging whether or not to end the opening effect and start the opening/closing execution mode effect in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. 23 described later (steps S2206 to S2208). . On the other hand, the opening/closing execution mode end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the opening/closing execution mode effect and start the ending effect in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. 23 described later (steps S2212 to S2214). .

[Jackpot game effect determination process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2007 in FIG. 19). In the jackpot game effect determination process, the effect to be executed in the jackpot game such as the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening/closing execution mode effect to be executed in the big win game is determined.

<Step S2101>
In step S2101, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect to be executed from the transition to the jackpot game to the start of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect according to the symbol combination of the stopped main symbols (or the first stop symbol) based on the opening effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. Also, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined opening effect type to the display control device 6 as an opening effect command. Here, the MPU 51, as an opening effect, indicates that the 16R probability variable jackpot is indicated when the symbol combination is "777", and the 5R probability variable jackpot when the symbol combination is "333". When the suggesting effect and the pattern combination are doubles other than '777' and '333', the effect suggesting the 5R normal jackpot is determined. That is, the opening effect is determined according to the symbol combination of the stopped main symbols (or the first stop symbol) rather than the jackpot type.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines an ending effect to be executed after the opening/closing execution mode is finished and before the jackpot game is finished. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the ending effect according to the jackpot type based on the ending effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. Also, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined ending effect type to the display control device 6 as an ending effect command.

Here, the ending effect informs the player that the jackpot game will end after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In addition, in the ending effect, for example, information such as a jackpot lottery result in the game round leading to the jackpot game (specification of the game state to be shifted after the jackpot game ends) is displayed on the pattern display section 341 . Specifically, in the ending production, the lottery result becomes a jackpot in the normal time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the normal non-time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode). When the initial hit is a 5R variable probability jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, an image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 to indicate that the game is shifted to a variable probability short-time gaming state, which is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, and the first prize is 5R. An image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 to clearly indicate that the game is shifted to the normal non-time-saving game state when the game is a normal jackpot. The image that clearly indicates the transition to the probability variable time-saving gaming state is, for example, "○○ RUSH rush". On the other hand, the image indicating that the normal non-time-saving gaming state is entered is, for example, "chance zone entry", and the number of times of time-saving is displayed together. In addition, in the ending effect when the lottery result is a big hit in the probability variable time-saving game state, the pattern display part 341 displays an image clearly indicating that the game state will be changed to the probability variable time-saving game state again. The image that clearly indicates that the game state is shifted to the probability variable time-saving gaming state again is, for example, "○○ RUSH continuation". In addition, the ending effect is an image showing the number of times of transition to a variable probability game state (for example, the number of times RUSH continues) for one first hit, and the image of the character that appeared in the big hit effect in the game round that led to the big win game. It may be displayed on the display unit 341 . The image showing the number of transitions to the probability variable time-saving gaming state and the image of the character are determined in this step S2102.

Furthermore, in the ending effect, the pattern display section 341 displays an image related to the number of paid balls, such as the number of paid balls in the jackpot game and the total number of paid balls during the consecutive games. Also, the ending effect may be one in which a confirmation image or the like that clearly indicates that the later-described Suspension Renso will be executed. These images are determined, for example, in step S2214 of the jackpot game effect processing, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag is set to ON, and when the first promotion effect flag is ON (step S2103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2104, When the 1 promotion effect flag is off (step S2103: No), the process proceeds to step S2106. The first promotion performance flag indicates that the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot during or after execution of the 5R normal jackpot open/close execution mode performance suggesting that the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot. It indicates whether or not to execute As for the first promotion effect flag, the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", and the symbol combination (symbol combination other than "333" and "777") suggesting the 5R normal jackpot is determined as the stop display result of the main symbol. If so, it is set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests a 5R normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect) as the effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode. For example, the 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511 . In addition, the MPU 51 transmits the type information of the determined 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect to the display control device 6 as an opening/closing execution mode effect command.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 determines the 5R probability variation promotion effect. The 5R probability variation promotion effect is determined based on the 5R probability variation promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits information on the type of the determined 5R probability variation promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a probability variation promotion effect command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second promotion effect flag is set to ON. When the 2 promotion effect flag is off (step S2106: No), the process proceeds to step S2109. The second promotion performance flag indicates that the lottery result is a 16R probability variation big win during or after the execution of the opening and closing execution mode performance for the 5R probability variation big winning suggesting that the lottery result is a 5R probability variation big win. It indicates whether or not to execute. This second promotion effect flag is the command judgment of FIG. It is set to ON in step S2003 in the process.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests a 5R probability variable jackpot (5R probability variable jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect) as the effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode. For example, the 5R probability variable jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 5R probability variable jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511 . In addition, the MPU 51 transmits the type information of the determined opening/closing execution mode effect for the 5R probability variable jackpot to the display control device 6 as an opening/closing execution mode effect command.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 determines the 16R promotion effect. The 16R promotion effect is determined based on the 16R promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the type of the selected 16R promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a 16R promotion effect command.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third promotion effect flag is set to ON, and if the third promotion effect flag is ON (step S2109: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2110, When the 3 promotion effect flag is off (step S2109: No), the process proceeds to step S2112. As for the third promotion performance flag, during or after the 5R normal jackpot suggesting performance suggesting that the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the 16R probability variable promotion performance indicating that the lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. It indicates whether or not This third promotion effect flag is set in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. is set to on.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, as in step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect) as a effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode, and executes the determined 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution. The type information of the mode effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an opening/closing execution mode effect command.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines the 16R probability variation promotion effect. The 16R probability variation promotion effect is determined based on the 16R probability variation promotion effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits information on the type of the determined 16R probability variation promotion effect to the display control device 6 as a 16R probability variation promotion effect command.

<Step S2112>
In step S2112, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 5R probability variable jackpot flag set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. : Yes), the process proceeds to step S2113, and when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is off (step S2112: No), the process proceeds to step S2114.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51, similarly to step S2107, determines an effect that suggests a 5R probability variable jackpot as the effect to be executed in the opening and closing execution mode (5R probability variable jackpot opening and closing execution mode effect), and determines the determined 5R probability variable jackpot opening and closing execution The type information of the mode performance is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an opening/closing execution mode performance command, and the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is set to OFF.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, which is set to ON in step S2003 in the command determination process of FIG. 19, is set to ON. : Yes), the process proceeds to step S2115, and when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is off (step S2114: No), the process proceeds to step S2116.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines an effect that suggests a 16R probability variable jackpot (16R probability variable jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect) as the effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode. For example, the 16R probability variable jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect is determined based on the 16R probability variable jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect table stored in the ROM 511 . In addition, the MPU 51 transmits the type information of the determined 16R probability variable jackpot open/close execution mode effect as an opening/closing execution mode effect command to the display control device 6, and sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to OFF.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, as in step S2104, the MPU 51 determines an effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot (5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect) as a effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode, and executes the determined 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution. The type information of the mode performance is transmitted to the display control device 6 as an opening/closing execution mode performance command, and the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to OFF.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game presentation process (step S1710 in FIG. 15). In the jackpot game effect process, the opening effect, ending effect, opening/closing execution mode effect, etc. determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 22 are executed.

<Step S2201>
In step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game effect start flag set to ON in step S2008 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to ON, and if the jackpot game effect start flag is ON ( Step S2201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2202, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Steps S2202 and S2203>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes opening effect start processing (step S2202), and sets the jackpot game effect start flag to OFF (step S2203). In the opening effect start processing, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the sound effect and the lamp effect as the opening effect determined in step S2101 of FIG. A command for causing the pattern display section 341 to execute image rendering is transmitted.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a so-called reservation consecutive house is executed after the end of the jackpot game. Reservation Renso is a jackpot (5R It is executed when information indicating that the probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) is included. In other words, the reservation series means that the jackpot game occurs within the number of games with the number M of reservations at the end of the jackpot game as the upper limit. For example, when the number M of reservations at the end of a jackpot game is 4, a case in which a jackpot occurs within 4 times of the game is called a reservation series. Whether or not the reservation series is executed can be determined, for example, by referring to the variation type area of the RAM 512 and determining whether or not the jackpot type specified by the second reservation command is stored.

However, in step S2204, at the stage of starting the opening effect, the variation type area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the reservation series is executed. That is, if the result of the big win lottery from the start of the big win game effect to the end of the open/close execution mode effect is a big win, it is not subject to the determination of the reserved consecutive houses in step S2204. Regarding the starting winning of the game ball to the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the open/close execution mode effect, for example, in the ending effect start process of step S2214 described later, it is suspended. By judging whether or not to execute the reserved consecutive villas confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the consecutive villas will be performed, in the case of executing the reserved consecutive villas confirmation effect, in step S2102 (see FIG. 22) of the jackpot game effect determination process In the determined ending effect, the reservation Renso confirmation effect is executed.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive house flag to ON, and ends the jackpot game effect processing. The reserved renso flag is a 5R probability variable music selection button production lottery table (see FIG. 45) or a 16R probability variation music selection button production lottery for determining the music selection button production in steps S2904 and S2906 of the music selection button production processing in FIG. 42 described later. It is referred to when selecting a table (see FIG. 48). Specifically, the pending Renso flag is set in steps S3003, S3008, S3014 and S3019 in the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process in FIG. 43, and steps S3103, S3108, S3114 and It is referred to in S3119. In other words, the reservation consecutive villa confirmation effect described later is executed for the reservation consecutive villas for which the result of the jackpot lottery before the opening effect is started is a big win. It should be noted that the judgment of the previous step S2204 is the steps S3003, S3008, S3014 and S3019 of the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing in FIG. You may make it perform in S3119. In this case, since the judgment as to whether or not the reservation series is executed is made at the stage of determining the music selection button presentation, the reservation series in the lottery during the jackpot game will be held until the music selection button presentation is started. Since it is a target, the possibility that the reserved consecutive villas confirmation effect will be executed is higher than in the case where it is determined whether the reserved consecutive villas will be executed at the stage of starting the opening effect (step S2204). Therefore, the interest in the game is improved for the player who wants to know during the jackpot game that the reservation series will be executed. Further, the reserved Renso confirmation effect may be executed in the ending effect as described above. The pending Renso confirmation effect in this case is performed when the player has set the music selection button effect so that the pending Renso confirmation effect is not executed (step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen process in FIG. 66 described later, or In the case where the reserved continuous villa fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON at step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. 73, the limited effect may be executed. As a result, even when the player has set non-execution for the reservation consecutive residence confirmation performance, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the reservation consecutive residence will be executed.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode start flag set to ON in step S2013 of FIG. 19 is set to ON. ), the process proceeds to step S2207, and when the opening/closing execution mode start flag is off (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2212.

<Steps S2207 and S2208>
When the opening/closing execution mode start flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 executes opening effect end processing (step S2207), and executes opening/closing execution mode effect start processing (step S2208). That is, the MPU 51 ends the opening effect and starts the opening/closing execution mode effect determined in steps S2104, S2107, S2110, S2113, S2115 or S2116 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG.

<Steps S2209 to S2211>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 executes music selection image display processing for displaying a music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) for allowing the player to select a music output in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game effect. Next, the MPU 51 outputs a song (initial provisionally selected song) corresponding to the provisionally selected song image 832 (initial provisionally selected song image) first displayed as the provisionally selected song image 832 in the song selection image 83 . Output processing is executed (step S2210). The temporarily selected music image 832 is selected by the player's decision operation on the decision button 21B from among a plurality of songs (20 songs in this embodiment) that can be output from the speaker 26 according to the player's selection in the jackpot state as described above. It is an image showing that it is a possible temporary selection music. In addition, the MPU 51 sets the opening/closing execution mode start flag to OFF (step S2211), and ends the jackpot game effect processing. Details of the music selection image display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the initial provisionally selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2212>
In step S2212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode end flag, which is set to ON in step S2013 in the command determination process of FIG. Step S2212: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2213, and when the opening/closing execution mode end flag is off (step S2212: No), the process proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2213>
When the opening/closing execution mode end flag is ON (step S2212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes opening/closing execution mode effect end processing (step S2213). In the opening/closing execution mode effect end processing, the MPU 51 terminates execution of image effects in the pattern display section 341 and output of music from the speaker 26, for example.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
The MPU 51 executes ending effect start processing (step S2214), sets the opening/closing execution mode end flag to off (S2215), and ends the jackpot game effect processing. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 to start the ending effect determined in step S2102 (see FIG. 22) of the jackpot game effect determination process. Incidentally, when the MPU 51 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image related to the number of paid balls such as the number of paid balls in a jackpot game or the total number of paid balls in a series of games as an ending effect, the MPU 51 displays the image related to the paid out balls before starting the ending effect. decide. In addition, when the MPU 51 executes the reservation consecutive villa confirmation effect in the ending production, the MPU 51 displays the reservation confirmation image on the pattern display unit 341, outputs the reservation confirmation sound from the speaker 26, etc. before starting the ending effect. Determines the production of the reservation Renso.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game effect end flag set to ON in step S2010 in the command determination process of FIG. 19 is set to ON, and if the jackpot game effect end flag is ON ( Step S2216: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2217, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2216: No), the process proceeds to step S2219.

<Steps S2217 and S2218>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the ending effect end process (step S2217), sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218), and Terminate the production process.

<Steps S2219 and S2220>
In step S2219, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the song selection flag set to ON in step S2306 in the song selection image display process of FIG. 24 described later is set to ON. If it is on (step S2219: Yes), music selection processing is executed (step S2220), and if the music selection processing flag is off (step S2219: No), the jackpot game effect processing ends. Details of the music selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Music selection image display processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the song selection image display process (step S2209 in FIG. 23). In the song selection image display process, a song selection image 83 for allowing the player to select a song to be output in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game effect is displayed on the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 25). Also, FIG. 25 is an example of a music selection image display screen 82 including a music selection image 83 displayed on the pattern display portion 341 . Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which an unselected song, which will be described later, is provisionally selected in the song selection image 83 . An example of the music selection image display screen 82 will first be described below with reference to FIG. 25, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, on the music selection image display screen 82, a music selection image 83, a selection determination portion image 84, an operation explanation image 85, and a lyric telop image 86 are displayed. Further, it is not essential to display images other than the music selection image 83 on the music selection image display screen 82, and some or all of the images other than the music selection image 83 may not be displayed. Other images may be displayed instead of part or all of the images other than the above.

The song selection image 83 allows the player to select a song to be output from the speaker 26 from a plurality of songs prepared in advance (20 songs A to T in this embodiment) to be output from the speaker 26. is. A prescribed number ("10" in this embodiment) is provided in advance for the number of music selection images 83 displayed in the pattern display section 341, and some of the plurality of music (20 in this embodiment) are displayed. 10 songs in the list) are displayed in a display area 837 preset in the pattern display section 341 . That is, the number of the plurality of songs is larger than the number of song selection images 83 (total number of already selected song images 831, provisionally selected song images 832 and unselected song images 833). Note that, in FIG. 25, music that is not displayed in the display area 837 among the plurality of music is indicated by a virtual line (reference numeral 838 in the figure). In addition, regarding the number of songs that can be output in the jackpot game, the number of songs prepared in advance to be output from the speaker 26 is greater than the display upper limit number, but the number of songs and the predetermined number of songs number may be the same.

The music selection image 83 includes an already selected music image 831, a provisionally selected music image 832, and an unselected music image 833 that are displayed so as to be distinguishable from each other. Here, being mutually distinguishable is not limited to the case where the selected music image 831, the provisionally selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 themselves are distinguishable. For example, the selected music image 831, the provisionally selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 are displayed in the same manner, and these images 831, 832, and 834 are marked (for example, the indicator image 835 and cursor image 836 in FIG. 25). It also includes the case where it becomes possible to distinguish from each other by adding an image such as.

The already-selected music image 831 is an image indicating that the already-selected music has already been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the music selection images 83 for music A, music J, and music D correspond to the already-selected music images 831 . The temporarily selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the temporarily selected music can be selected by the player's decision operation on the decision button 21B. In the example of FIG. 25 , the song selection image 83 for song H corresponds to the temporarily selected song image 832 . The unselected song image 833 is an image indicating that the song is a song other than the already selected songs and has not been selected by the player. In the example of FIG. 25, the song selection images 83 for song K, song L, song M, song I, song B, and song C correspond to the unselected song images 833 . However, as will be described later, an upper limit (3 in this embodiment) is provided for already-selected songs. It is processed not as a song but as an unselected song.

In the music selection image 83 , the temporarily selected music image 832 is changed by the player operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 . Details of the already-selected music image 831, the provisionally-selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833, and details of an example of changing the provisionally-selected music image 832 by the player's operation of the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 will be described later. do.

For convenience of explanation, FIG. 25 shows a case where an already selected music image 831, a provisionally selected music image 832, and an unselected music image 834 are simultaneously displayed as the music selection image 83. However, in this embodiment, As will be described later, the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed in the music selection image 83 that is first displayed on the pattern display portion 341 (see FIG. 26).

These music images 831 to 833 (music selection image 83 ) are displayed in a display area 837 set on the left side of the pattern display section 341 . This display area 837 is set to an area of, for example, 1/3 or less, preferably 1/4 or less, more preferably 1/5 or less of the area of the music selection image display screen 82 of the pattern display section 341. is set to the area of The display area 837 may be set in a part of the music selection image display screen 82, and does not necessarily have to be set on the left side of the music selection image display screen 82. It may be on the lower side or the like.

By the way, some conventional gaming machines display a music selection image over the entire display screen or substantially the entire display screen. For example, in some cases, a plurality of rectangular music selection images are displayed in a matrix over the entire display screen or substantially the entire display screen. In such a conventional game machine, while the music selection image is displayed on the display screen, the opening/closing execution mode effect executed by the pattern display unit 341 cannot be visually recognized, and the opening/closing execution mode effect is not visible while the music is being selected. can't enjoy

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the display area 837 is set in a part of the music selection image display screen 82 (on the left side in this embodiment). Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, even when the music selection image 83 is displayed, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the open/close mode effect, and the player can enjoy the open/close execution mode effect even during the music selection. can.

Also, in the display area 837, the selected music image 831, the provisionally selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 are displayed vertically in this order. Specifically, in the display area 837, the music selection images 83 are, in order from the top, up to the third selected music image 831, the fourth temporarily selected music image 832, and the remaining six unselected music images 833. . In the music selection images 83 arranged in this manner, the temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed between the already selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833 . Note that the music selection images 83 are not limited to being arranged vertically in the display area 837, and may be displayed horizontally, diagonally, in a matrix, or the like.

The already-selected music image 831 is an image indicating that the already-selected music has already been selected by the player. The already-selected music image 831 is divided into the temporarily selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 831 depending on the color, pattern, and pattern of the contour portion such as the frame, the character portion, and the character background portion, as well as the color, size, and shape of the effect around the contour portion. It is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the selected music image 833 . Also, an upper limit is set in advance for the number of already-selected music images 831 in the music selection image 83 . In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of already-selected music images 831 is three. This upper limit number is not limited to 3 and may be 1, but is preferably selected from numbers of 2 or more. However, the upper limit of the number of already-selected music images 831 takes into account the number of images 831 to 834 displayed as the music selection image 83, the ease of selection when selecting the already-selected music based on the already-selected music image 831, and the like. In that case, it is preferable to select from the range of 2 to 5.

The already-selected music image 831 is given a display order (music order). In the present embodiment, the display order of the song selection date and time is increased in descending order, and the higher the display order of the already-selected song, the closer it is to the provisionally selected song image 832 in the initial song selection image 83 . In the example of FIG. 25, already-selected music images 831 for music A, music J, and music D, which are already-selected music, are displayed in the display area 837 at the top three positions in the upper and lower rows of the music selection images 83. ing. That is, the song selection dates and times of song A, song J, and song D among the plurality of songs are new in this order. Further, in the present embodiment, the already-selected music image 831 is displayed in a predetermined area while the music selection image 83 is being displayed. Specifically, the already-selected song images 831 are fixedly displayed at the top to third positions in the upper and lower rows of the song selection images 83, and even when the provisional selection images 832 described later are changed, The position of the already selected music image 831 does not change. However, when the already-selected music is provisionally selected, the music selection image 83 for the already-selected music that has been provisionally selected as described later is displayed as a provisionally-selected music image 832 instead of the already-selected music image 831 (Fig. 27(A) to FIG. 27(C)).

The display order for the already-selected music image 831 may be given based on conditions other than the date and time of selection, such as the frequency of selection. The selection frequency is, for example, the cumulative number of selections, the number of selections in the most recent predetermined number of times (eg, 10 times), or the selection rate in the most recent predetermined number of times. Also, hereinafter, the term "selection frequency" is used with the same meaning.

In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined mark (in the example of FIG. 25, the character “favorite”) is added to the side of the already-selected music image 831 to distinguish it from the provisionally-selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833. is facilitated. However, the already-selected music image 831 only needs to be distinguishable from the provisionally-selected music image 832 and the unselected music image 833, and the predetermined mark may be omitted. The music image 832 or the unselected music image 833 may be displayed in the same manner as the music image 832 and may be distinguished only by the predetermined mark, and the display manner is not limited.

By the way, in the conventional game machine, the image for the temporarily selected music was made distinguishable from other music, but the image for the temporarily selected music, including the music selected in the past, was displayed in the same manner. . On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selected music image 831 for the already selected music is distinguished from the unselected music image 832 for the unselected music. can be distinguished from unselected songs. As a result, the already-selected music can be easily found, and the operation of selecting the already-selected music is facilitated. Further, when the display position of the already-selected music image 831 is set to a predetermined area and the provisionally-selected music image 832 is displayed below and adjacent to the already-selected music image 831, the player will not see the music selection image 83 displayed. In this case, the most recently selected already selected music can be easily found, and the most recently selected music can be selected again by operating the selection determination unit 21 . Furthermore, the already-selected songs are given a display order, and are displayed in the initial song selection image 83 in a position close to the temporarily selected song image 832 in descending order of the display order. will not be Therefore, the player can easily find out the already-selected music that he/she wants to select when, for example, the same music has been repeatedly selected and the player wants to select an already-selected music other than the same music. As a result, the player's operation burden is reduced when reselecting a previously selected song.

In addition, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to select a plurality of songs during a predetermined song selection valid period (for example, the period during which the opening and closing execution mode for the first round is executed) per one jackpot game. However, when music is selected a plurality of times in one jackpot game, only the final selected music is the selected music (step S2813 of the selected music output process in FIG. 41). . Further, when the number of already-selected songs is less than the upper limit, for example, when the number of already-selected songs is 1 or 2, the number of already-selected song images 831 corresponding to the number of already-selected songs are displayed. On the other hand, if the number of already-selected songs is 0, or if the player has set not to display the already-selected song image 831 as described later (step S4013 of the song list display setting process in FIG. 63, or If the already-selected music image non-display setting flag is set to ON in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 71), the already-selected music image 831 is not displayed. At this time, the unselected music images 833 other than the unselected music images 834 are displayed when the number of already selected music does not reach the upper limit. As a result, even if the number of already-selected music images 831 to be displayed in the pattern display section 341 is less than the upper limit, by displaying the unselected music images 833 instead of the already-selected music images 831, The specified number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 without excess or deficiency.

The temporarily selected music image 832 is an image indicating that the temporarily selected music can be selected by the player's decision operation on the decision button 21B. In the example of FIG. 25, the song H is the temporarily selected song, and the temporarily selected song image 832 can be distinguished from the already selected song image 831 and the unselected song image 833 . The temporarily selected music image 832 has a predetermined mark (an indicator image 835 of characters “temporary” in this embodiment) attached to the side, and a cursor image 836 for emphasizing that it is the temporarily selected music image 832 . surrounded by

Note that the temporarily selected music image 832 may be distinguished from the already selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833, and the predetermined mark may be omitted. The display mode may be the same as the music image 831 or the unselected music image 833, and only the predetermined mark may be displayed, and the display mode is not limited.

Also, the provisionally selected music image 832 is changed according to the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 . In this embodiment, when the already-selected music image 831 is displayed, the already-selected music image 831 is displayed in a predetermined area, that is, the top three positions of the top and bottom rows of the music selection image 83. Therefore, the changing mode of the temporarily selected music image 832 differs between when an already-selected music is provisionally selected and when an unselected music is provisionally selected. Here, FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an initial display example of the music selection image 83, and FIGS. be. 26 and FIGS. 27A to 27C show only the display area 837 of the music selection image display screen 82 of the pattern display section 341. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 26, when temporarily selecting a song from unselected songs, the down selection button 212 is operated. By doing so, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 remain unchanged, and the unselected music image 833 is scrolled downward. In the example shown in FIG. 26, by operating the lower selection button 212, the tentatively selected music is looped and changed in the order of music P→music T→music S→...→music F→music E→music P. . Further, when a desired unselected music piece is temporarily selected, the unselected music piece can be output from the speaker 26 as a selected music piece by operating the decision button 21B.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the music selection image 83 that is first displayed on the pattern display section 341, the non-selected music (non-selected image 834) is displayed in the music loop when the music is provisionally selected from the unselected music. is arranged at the farthest position from the initial provisionally selected music image 832 (initial provisionally selected music).

On the other hand, when temporarily selecting a song from the already selected songs, the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 is operated. Specifically, first, by operating the upper selection button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. The music selection image 83 corresponding to the music A displayed one above the music P is displayed. As a result, the song selection image 83 for the song P is changed from the temporarily selected song image 832 to the unselected song image 833, while the song selection image 83 for the song A is changed from the already selected song image 831 to the temporarily selected song image 832. be done. Further, by operating the determination button 21B, it is possible to select the provisionally selected song A (already selected song).

Further, by operating the upper selection button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. to the song selection image 83 for As a result, the music selection image 83 for the music A is changed from the temporarily selected music image 832 to the already selected music image 831, while the music selection image 83 for the music J is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the temporarily selected music image 832. be done. Further, by operating the determination button 21B, it becomes possible to select the temporarily selected song J (already selected song).

Similarly, by operating the up operation button 211 once in the state shown in FIG. While being changed to the image 831 , the music selection image 83 for the music D is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the provisionally selected music image 832 . Accordingly, by operating the decision button 21B, it is possible to select the provisionally selected music D (already selected music). Note that even if the upper selection button 211 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 27C, the temporarily selected music image 832 is not changed, and the state in which the music D is temporarily selected is maintained.

On the other hand, by operating the lower operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 27(B) or FIG. 27(C), the indicator image 835 and The cursor image 836 moves to the song selection image 83 corresponding to the next song down, and the temporarily selected song is changed, and the temporarily selected song A or song J is selected by operating the enter button 21B. it becomes possible to

By operating the down operation button 212 once in the state shown in FIG. 27(A), the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 change to the music selection image 83 corresponding to the music P which is the unselected music one level below. Along with the movement, the temporarily selected music is changed. Accordingly, as described with reference to FIG. 26, a song is provisionally selected from unselected songs by operating the down selection button 212, and an unselected song is selected by operating the decision button 21B. It can be output from the speaker 26 .

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine such as the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in which a song to be output during a jackpot game can be selected from a plurality of songs. The number of songs that can be selected in the jackpot game varies depending on the model, but there are some that allow selection of songs to be output during the special game from 20 or more songs. When the number of selectable songs is large, the range of song selection is widened, so that not only can a variety of songs be enjoyed, but also the possibility of including songs that suit the taste of the player increases. Therefore, in a game machine that allows selection of music during a jackpot game, the player listens to various songs and finds a favorite song, thereby increasing the interest in the jackpot game and the interest in the special game. It is possible to improve the willingness to play.

However, in the conventional game machine, although the image for the temporarily selected music is displayed separately from the images for other music, the previously selected music or the temporarily selected music image 832 in the music selection image 83 that has been selected in the past is displayed first. The images for the non-selected songs that were not selected by the player despite being displayed on the screen were displayed without distinction from each other. Therefore, when the player wants to repeatedly select a favorite song or listen to a previously selected song again, it becomes difficult to find the target song. You are forced to perform troublesome operations. The difficulty of finding such a target song increases as the number of selectable songs increases. In addition, there are gaming machines in which a period (music selection valid period) during which music to be output during a jackpot game can be selected is set. For example, there is a game machine in which the music selection valid period is limited to the opening effect in the jackpot game or the end of the first round of the round game (opening/closing execution mode). In such a game machine, the target music must be searched for within a limited period of time, which is not so long, which makes it even more difficult to find the target music. In addition, if the selection of the target music in the jackpot game is troublesome and difficult, there is a concern that the player will not select the music in the jackpot game. In this method, a plurality of songs are prepared, and the player is allowed to select a song and listen to various songs, and the player is allowed to find a favorite song, thereby increasing attention and interest in the jackpot game. The purpose of improving the desire to play is buried.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the song selection image 83 for allowing the player to select a song, an already-selected song indicating that the already-selected song has already been selected by the player. The music image 831 is displayed in the pattern display section 341 so as to be distinguishable from the unselected music image 833 . In this way, since the already-selected music image 831 is distinguishable from the unselected music image 833, the player can select the previously-selected music from the music selection image 83 when selecting the already-selected music. , the already-selected music can be provisionally selected based on the already-selected music image 831 and selected. Specifically, the player operates the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 of the selection determining unit 21 while confirming the position of the already selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83, thereby selecting the already selected music. It can be temporarily selected and displayed as a temporarily selected music image 832 . In this state, by operating the decision button 21B, the already selected music can be output from the speaker 26 again as the selected music. Therefore, when a player wants to repeatedly select a favorite song or listen to a previously selected song again, even if the number of selectable songs is large, the player can easily find the already selected song. can be done. In addition, it is possible to efficiently select a previously selected music piece and output the selected music piece from the speaker 26 with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 .

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the temporarily selected music image 832 is displayed between the already selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833 in the music selection image 83, and the already selected image is displayed in the temporarily selected music image 832. Both 831 and unselected image 833 are displayed adjacently. Therefore, by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 to change the temporarily selected music image 832 in the music selection image 832, the player can change the previously selected music and the previously selected music. Even if any of the unselected songs that have never been played is selected, the target song can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can accommodate various types of players, such as players who tend to select already selected songs repeatedly and players who tend to select unselected songs. target music can be selected with a small number of operations.

Returning to FIG. 25, the unselected music image 833 is an image indicating that the music is other than the selected music. In the example of FIG. 25, music K, music L, music M, music I, music B, and music C are unselected music. The unselected music image 833 is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the already selected music image 831 and the temporarily selected music image 832 . The unselected music image 833 includes an unselected music image 834 indicating that the music is not selected. A non-selected song is a song that has not been selected by the player even though it was initially displayed as the temporarily selected song image 832 in the song selection image 83 . In the example of FIG. 25, music I, music B, and music C are non-selected music. The non-selected music image 834 is different from the unselected music image 833, for example, in the unselected music image 833 depending on the color, pattern, and pattern of the contour portion such as the frame, the character portion, and the character background portion, as well as the color, size, and shape of the effect around the contour portion. The non-selected music image 834 is displayed so as to be distinguishable. In the present embodiment, a predetermined mark (in this embodiment, the character "disliked") is added to the side of the non-selected music image 834, so that the non-selected music image 834 can be easily distinguished. However, the non-selected music image 834 may be distinguished as long as it can be distinguished, and the predetermined mark may be omitted, or it may be distinguished only by the predetermined mark. do not have.

Also, an upper limit is set in advance for the number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 . In this embodiment, the maximum number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 is three. It should be noted that the upper limit number of non-selected music images 834 displayed in the music selection image 83 may be other than three, as with the already selected music images 831 . Further, when the number of non-selected songs is less than the upper limit, for example, when the number of non-selected songs is 1 or 2, the number of non-selected song images 834 corresponding to the number of non-selected songs is displayed. On the other hand, if the number of non-selected songs is 0, or if the player has set not to display the non-selected song image 834 as described later (step S4013 of the song list display setting process in FIG. 63, or If the non-selected music image non-display setting flag is set to ON in step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing in FIG. 71), the non-selected music image 834 is not displayed. When the unselected music images 834 are displayed and the number of unselected music does not reach the upper limit, the unselected music images 833 other than the unselected music images 834 are displayed to compensate for the shortage. In this way, even if the number of unselected music images 834 to be displayed in the pattern display section 341 is less than the upper limit, the unselected music images 834 other than the unselected music images 834 are displayed instead of the unselected music images 834 . By displaying the images 833 , the prescribed number of music selection images 83 can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 without excess or deficiency.

The selection determining portion image 84 is an image that imitates the selection determining portion 21 and indicates that the temporarily selected music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 . The operation explanation image 85 explains that the temporarily selected music can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, and that the temporarily selected music can be determined as the music to be output from the speaker 26 by operating the enter button 21B. It is a thing. The lyrics telop image 86 displays the lyrics of the temporarily selected music output from the speaker 26 or the music selected by the player in accordance with the output of the music. However, the selection determination portion image 84, the operation explanation image 85, and the lyrics telop image 86 are not essential images, and all or part of them may be omitted.

In this embodiment, the case of selecting a song by using the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 has been described as an example. 214 may be used to select music. For example, the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are used to select music from unselected music, and the left selection button 213 and right selection button 214 are used to select music from the already selected music. good too. In this case, for example, by operating the upper selection button 211, the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 remain unchanged, and the unselected music image 833 is scrolled upward. The selected music image 833 is scrolled downward, and the music selection image 83 moved to the positions of the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 is changed from the unselected music image 833 to the provisionally selected music image 832 . On the other hand, when the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated, the indicator image 835 and the cursor image 836 move upward or downward, and the music selection image 83 for the already selected music changes to the temporarily selected music image 832. It may be made to be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display position of the already-selected music image 831 is predetermined, but as shown in FIG. The selected music image 833 may be scrolled upward A1 or downward A2. By doing so, compared to the case of changing the provisionally selected music by the method described with reference to FIGS. Since a song can be provisionally selected from any of the selected songs, the operability when provisionally selecting a song is improved. As shown in FIG. 28, even when the selected music image 831 and the unselected music image 833 are scrolled upward A1 or downward A2 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, In the music selection image 83 displayed in the pattern display portion 341, it is preferable that the non-selected music (non-selected image 834) is arranged at the farthest position from the initial provisionally selected music image 832 (initial provisionally selected music).

<Steps S2301 and S2302>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2301, the MPU 51 creates an already-selected music list for displaying the music selection image 83. FIG. The MPU 51 also creates a non-selected music list (step S2302). The selected music list and the non-selected music list are referred to when creating an initial sequence data table (see FIG. 31) for the music selection image 83, which will be described later, and are stored in the RAM 512 shown in FIG. 29, for example. It can be created from the music selection counter data table.

Here, FIG. 29 is an example of a song selection counter data table for a plurality of songs that can be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game effect. As shown in FIG. 29, the song selection counter data table includes selection count counters, history data about already selected songs, and history data about non-selected songs. Further, in the song selection counter data table, songs whose already-selected flags are set to OFF are data related to unselected songs, and among these data, data whose unselected flags are set to ON are unselected songs. This is data about This song selection counter data table is updated by the song selection counter data update process in FIG. 39, which will be described later. Details of updating the music selection counter data table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The number-of-selection counter selects 20 songs A to T as songs to be output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game effect from a predetermined starting point (for example, when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned on) to the present. It indicates the number of selections made. In this embodiment, the order of the already-selected songs is determined based on the selection date and time. However, when the order of the already-selected songs is determined by the frequency of selection, the order of the already-selected songs is determined by referring to the selection counter. .

The history data regarding the already-selected songs consists of song order data and already-selected flags for each of the songs A to T. FIG.

The song ranking data specifies the display position of the already-selected song image 831, and the lowest ranking is assigned to the most recently selected song image 831, and the display ranking is increased. Specifically, regarding the display order of the already-selected songs, the top three songs are assigned first to third ranks, and the remaining songs are not ranked. In the table shown in FIG. 29, "1", "2" or "3" is written according to the display order, and "0" is written for no order. That is, the display order of the already-selected songs is that song A is first, song J is second, song D is third, and the remaining songs other than song A, song J, and song D are not ranked. Note that if there is no song corresponding to the top three songs (a state in which no song selection has been performed), all songs are unranked. Also, if there are two songs corresponding to the top three songs, only the first and second place will be decided without deciding the third place. Similarly, if there is one song corresponding to the top three songs, Only 1st place is determined without determining 2nd and 3rd place.

The already-selected flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display as the already-selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83 . The MPU 51 decides to turn on the already selected flag for a song to which one of the first to third display rankings is assigned in the song selection counter data updating process of FIG. 39, which will be described later. It is determined to set the already-selected flag to OFF for songs that do not have a . Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data related to the already-selected songs in the song selection counter data table, and according to the song ranking data, the MPU 51 displays the already-selected song image 831 in the song selection image 83 as shown in FIG. 30(A). Create a list of selected songs.

On the other hand, the history data relating to non-selected songs consists of song ranking data and non-selection flags for each of songs A to T. FIG.

The song ranking data specifies the display positions of the non-selected song images 834, and the songs that were not selected most recently are assigned the lowest ranking in descending order, and the display ranking is increased. As for the display order of the non-selected songs, the top three songs are assigned first to third ranks, and the remaining songs are not ranked. In the table shown in FIG. 29, the display order of the non-selected songs is such that song C is first, song B is second, song I is third, and the remaining songs other than song C, song B, and song I are displayed. is unranked. Note that if there is no song corresponding to the top three songs, none of the songs are ranked. Also, if there are two songs that correspond to the top three songs, only the first and second places are decided without deciding the third place. Similarly, if there is one song that corresponds to the top three songs, Only 1st place is determined without determining 2nd and 3rd place.

The non-selection flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the non-selected music image 834 in the music selection image 83 . The MPU 51 decides to set the non-selection flag to ON for songs to which one of the first to third display rankings is assigned in the song selection counter data update process of FIG. 39, which will be described later. It is determined to set the already-selected flag to OFF for songs that do not have a . Then, the MPU 51 refers to the history data related to the non-selected songs in the song selection counter data table, and according to the song ranking data, as shown in FIG. Create a non-selected music list.

In addition, the MPU 51 may assign the lowest ranking to the highest selection frequency (for example, the cumulative number of selections or the selection rate in a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) from the latest) in the history data regarding the selected songs and the non-selected songs. The display order may be any other number of songs than the upper limit of three songs as in the illustrated example. For example, priority may be assigned to all songs.

<Step S2303>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2303, the MPU 51 determines the temporary selection music (initial temporary selection music) when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the pattern display section 341 after shifting to the jackpot game. Selected music determination processing is executed. The details of the initially provisionally selected music piece determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
When the initial provisionally selected music piece determination process in step S2303 ends, the MPU 51 stores the initial provisionally selected music piece determined in step S2303 in the RAM 512 (step S2304), and executes initial music selection image display processing (step S2305). Note that the initial provisionally selected music stored in step S2304 is referred to when determining whether or not the initial provisionally selected music is selected in step S3202 in the music selection counter data updating process in FIG. 50, which will be described later. Also, in the initial music selection image display processing in step S2305, the MPU 51 determines the initial arrangement for a plurality of music pieces, and transmits the initial arrangement order data regarding this initial arrangement to the pattern display section 341. FIG. The initial arrangement is determined based on, for example, the already-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30A, the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. be.

Here, FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an initial arrangement order data table regarding the initial arrangement order for a plurality of songs for displaying the song selection image 83, and FIG. 32 is an example of the initial arrangement of the song selection image 83. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIG. 31, the initial sequence data table tabulates the initial sequence data, and includes the sequence data regarding the initial sequence and additional data.

The arrangement order data defines the initial arrangement order for a plurality of songs A to T. The initial arrangement order is 1st to 20th, the 1st to 3rd are assigned to already selected songs, and the 11th to 13th are assigned to non-selected songs. Specifically, the 1st to 3rd places in the initial arrangement order are assigned to the 3rd, 2nd and 1st places in the selected song list order in the already selected song list table shown in FIG. 30(A), respectively. . According to the order of the already-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30A, music D, music J, and music A are assigned to the first to third initial arrangement rankings. The 11th to 13th initial arrangement rankings are assigned to the 1st, 2nd and 3rd non-selected music rankings in the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30(B), respectively. According to the order of the non-selected music list table shown in FIG. 30(B), music I, music B and music C are assigned to the 11th to 13th initial arrangement rankings. In addition, the 4th place in the initial arrangement order is assigned to the tentatively selected song. The example shown in FIG. 31 indicates that the song P was determined as the provisionally selected song in step S2303 of FIG. Also, the 5th to 10th and 14th to 20th places of the initial arrangement order are assigned to unselected songs other than unselected songs. The unselected songs other than the unselected songs are assigned to the lowest ranks of the 5th to 10th and the 14th to 20th in ascending order of the song numbers. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the song E is ranked 5th, the song F is ranked 6th, the song G is ranked 7th, the song H is ranked 8th, and the song K is ranked 8th. Song L is ranked 10th, Song M is ranked 14th, Song N is ranked 15th, Song O is ranked 16th, and Song Q is ranked 16th. The song R is assigned to the 17th place in the song order, the song S is assigned to the 19th place in the song order, and the song T is assigned to the 20th place in the song order.

On the other hand, the additional data includes music type data indicating whether the music is already selected music, provisionally selected music, unselected music, or unselected music other than unselected music, and non-display settings for the already selected music and unselected music. Contains data indicating whether the flag is set on or off. Here, the non-display setting flags for the selected music pieces and the non-selected music pieces are displayed in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 other than the unselected music image 834 for each of the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834. A flag that is set to ON if it is set by the player to be displayed. In the present embodiment, the non-display setting flag is the selected music image non-display setting flag that displays the already selected music image 831 in the same display mode as the unselected music image 833, and the non-selected music image 834 as the non-selected music image. It includes an unselected music image non-display setting flag for displaying in the same display mode as the unselected music image 833 other than 834 . The selected music image non-display setting flag and the non-selected music image non-display setting flag are set in step S4013 of the music list display setting screen processing shown in FIG. 63 or step S4413 of the music list display setting history screen processing shown in FIG. is set to on.

In the example of FIG. 31, the MPU 51 determines, based on the additional data, that the music A, the music J, and the music D are the already-selected music, that the non-display flag for the already-selected music is set to off, that the music M, It can be specified that music I and music B are non-selected music, that the non-display flag for already selected music is set to off, and that music P is a provisionally selected music.

According to the initial arrangement order shown in FIG. 31, the initial arrangement for a plurality of songs is in the order shown in FIG. displayed in a different manner. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of song selection images 83 displayed on the song selection image display screen 82 is 10, the song selection images 83 corresponding to songs ranked first to tenth in the initial arrangement order are displayed. be. Also, since the non-display flag for the already-selected music is set to off, the music selection image 83 is displayed as if it includes the already-selected music image 831 . Note that the non-selected songs are initially arranged in positions furthest from the temporarily selected songs because the initial arrangement order is assigned to 11th to 13th. That is, when creating the initial arrangement order data, the MPU 51 arranges the non-selected music at the position where the minimum number of times the selection button 21A is operated to make the non-selected music the temporary selected music is the largest. Also, the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the non-selected music is not displayed when the music selection image 83 is first displayed on the pattern display section 341, and the unselected music is displayed when the lower selection button 212 is operated by the player. An image 833 is displayed by scrolling.

In the present embodiment, already selected songs are assigned to the 1st to 3rd places in the initial arrangement order, and non-selected songs are assigned to the 11th to 13th places in the initial arrangement order. There is no need to gather the number of already-selected songs in one place, and similarly, there is no need to gather the upper limit number of non-selected songs in one place. For example, as shown in FIG. , and an upper limit number of non-selected songs may be discretely assigned. In the example shown in FIG. 34, a plurality of songs are arranged with their song numbers unchanged, and the initial arrangement of the songs is determined so that the initial arrangement order of the song P determined as the tentatively selected song is 4th. It is

<Step S2306>
Returning to the description of FIG. 24, in step S2306, the MPU 51 sets the music selection processing flag to ON, and terminates the music selection image display processing. For example, the music selection processing flag is referred to when determining whether or not to continue the music selection processing (step S2219 in the jackpot game effect processing in FIG. 23) and whether or not the music selection valid period has elapsed (see FIG. step S2608 in the song selection process of 39).

[Initial Temporarily Selected Song Determination Processing]
Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisionally selected music piece determination process (step S2303 in FIG. 24). In the initial provisionally selected music piece determination process, the initial provisionally selected music piece corresponding to the initial provisionally selected music image 832 to be displayed first as the temporarily selected music image 832 of the music selection image 83 is selected based on the value obtained from the provisionally selected music lottery counter. decide.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
The MPU 51 acquires the value of the initial provisionally selected music lottery counter in order to select the initial provisionally selected music piece (step S2401), refers to the provisionally selected music lottery table, and corresponds to the value of the provisionally selected music lottery counter acquired in step S2401. The song to be selected is tentatively determined as an initial tentatively selected song (step S2402).

Here, FIG. 36 is an example of a temporarily selected music lottery table. As shown in FIG. 36, the temporarily selected music lottery table associates the value of the temporarily selected music lottery counter with music A to T. As shown in FIG. For example, when the obtained value of the initial provisionally selected music lottery counter is "0", the MPU 51 provisionally determines the music A as the initial provisionally selected music piece, and the acquired value of the initial provisionally selected music lottery counter is "88". , music I is tentatively determined as an initial provisionally selected music, and when the obtained value of the initial provisionally selected music lottery counter is "155", music P is provisionally determined as an initial provisionally selected music.

<Steps S2403 and S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 35, in step S2403, the MPU 51 determines whether the music provisionally determined as the initial provisionally selected music is the already selected music or the non-selected music (disliked music), that is, whether it is the unselected music. If the tentatively determined song is a selected song or a non-selected song (not an unselected song) (step S2403: Yes), the initial provisionally selected song is determined without determining the initial provisionally selected song End decision processing. That is, the MPU 51 executes the initial provisionally selected music piece determination processing again in the next secondary timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), and attempts to determine the initial provisionally selected music piece. On the other hand, when the temporarily determined music is neither selected music nor non-selected music (step S2403: No), the MPU 51 determines the music temporarily determined in step S2402 as the initial provisionally selected music. (step S2404), and the initial provisionally selected music piece determination processing ends. For example, whether or not the song is already selected or unselected can be determined by referring to the song selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) and determining whether the already selected flag or non-selected flag is set to ON. In the example of FIG. 29, if the songs tentatively determined by the lottery in step S2402 are song A, song D, or song J, it is determined to be the already-selected song, and the tentatively decided songs are song B, song B, and song J. If it is C or music I, it is determined to be a non-selected music. Thus, until songs other than the already selected songs (song A, song D and song J) and the non-selected songs (song B, song C and song I) are determined as the initial tentatively selected songs (step S2403: No), The initial provisionally selected music piece determination process is repeatedly performed.

By the way, the already-selected songs are songs that the player has listened to before by selection by the player, and the non-selected songs are songs that the player has listened to before by being output as initial tentatively selected songs. is. When the initial tentatively selected music is determined from the already selected music or the non-selected music, the music that the player has listened to before is output, so the opportunity for the player to listen to the unselected music is reduced. In addition, non-selected music is music that the player has not previously selected. unable to entertain.

On the other hand, in step S2403, a lottery of initially provisionally selected songs is performed until songs other than the already selected songs and the non-selected songs are selected. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already-selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected songs in the process up to that point, and the player can appreciate the goodness of the unselected songs. You can secure an opportunity to convey In addition, the player is bothered by the fact that a song that was previously selected as a provisionally selected song in step S2404 but was not selected by the player is selected again in step S2404 and displayed as the provisionally selected song image 832. released from.

It should be noted that if the player has set the previously-selected music image 831 to be non-display, which will be described later (step S4013 in the music list display setting screen process in FIG. 63 or step S4413 in the music list display setting history screen process in FIG. 71). (when the non-display setting flag is set to ON), the music pieces including the already selected music pieces may be selected as the initially provisionally selected music pieces. Similarly, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to not be displayed by the player, the music including the non-selected music may be selected as the initial provisionally selected music. That is, the already selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 may not be selected as the initial provisionally selected music only when those images 831 and 834 are displayed as the music selection image 83. .

[Initial Temporarily Selected Song Output Processing]
Here, FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the initial provisionally selected music output process (step S2210 in FIG. 23). In the initial temporary selection music output process, when the temporary selection music image 832 is first displayed on the pattern display part 341 after shifting to the jackpot game, the initial temporary selection music corresponding to the initial temporary selection music image 832 is output from the speaker 26.例文帳に追加processing. In this initial provisionally selected music output process, the initially provisionally selected music is normally output from the speaker 26 in the default melody pattern. A melody pattern defines an output start portion when outputting a piece of music from the speaker 26 .

Here, FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a melody pattern table in which default settings of melody patterns are defined for each of a plurality of songs (song A to song T) for provisionally selected songs and selected songs. In the example of the melody pattern table shown in FIG. 38, melody pattern 1 and melody pattern 2 are defined as melody patterns. The melody pattern 1 has a basic unit of "A melody (singing part)→B melody→chorus part", and the output of the music is started from the A melody (singing part), and the basic unit is repeatedly output. That is, in the case of melody pattern 1, "A melody (singing part) -> B melody -> Chorus part -> A melody (singing part) -> B melody -> Chorus part -> A melody (singing part) ->..." becomes. As a basic unit of melody pattern 1, it is also possible to include an intro part (prelude part), that is, "intro part (prelude part)→A melody (singing part)→B melody→chorus part". be done. In this case, the output start of melody pattern 1 is not the A melody (singing part) but the intro part. The basic unit of melody pattern 2 is "chorus part→A melody (singing part)→B melody". Further, in the provisionally selected music including the initial provisionally selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern for all of the music A to T is set to melody pattern 2, that is, the output starts from the chorus part. In the provisionally selected songs, the default setting is melody pattern 2 for all songs A to T, but the default setting for some or all songs may be melody pattern 1. FIG. Also, the default setting of the melody pattern of the selected music will be described later in the selected music output process of FIG.

In this embodiment, the player can set a melody pattern different from the default setting as described later with regard to the output of provisionally selected music including the initial provisionally selected music (melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. 61). , or melody pattern setting history screen processing in FIG. 69), if the player has set a melody pattern different from the default setting, the initially provisionally selected music is output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern set by the player. be.

Furthermore, in the initial temporary selection music output process, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (when the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect), by randomly selecting the melody pattern , the melody pattern of the initially tentatively selected music may be inconsistent. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default and the output start part of the initially provisionally selected music is the chorus part, if the promotion effect flag is set to ON, the output of the initially provisionally selected music is started. The part may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, the beginning part of the music (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing part)). Randomly selecting a melody pattern has the same meaning as performing a contradictory output lottery (step S2804 of the selected music output process in FIG. 41 described later).

When output contradiction (contradiction of melody patterns) occurs in the output start portion of the initially provisionally selected music piece, the promotion performance is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is output as the initial provisionally selected music piece. It establishes an outcome that is more favorable to the player than previously suggested. Therefore, when the output start portion of the initially provisionally selected music piece has an output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction), the player can, for example, find that the current game state is a 5R variable jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state. It is possible to know that it is either the game state or the 16R probability variable jackpot game state, or that it is the 16R probability variable jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variable jackpot game state.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there was no contradiction in the melody pattern when the initially tentatively selected music was output. Therefore, conventional gaming machines cannot arouse the player's interest in the effect of outputting the initially tentatively selected music. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp in advance that the promotion effect will be executed by the confirmation effect that the melody pattern of the initially tentatively selected music is inconsistent. Therefore, the player can confirm whether or not the fixed effect will be executed by paying attention to the melody pattern of the initially tentatively selected music piece. Since the player can pay attention to the performance, the player can enjoy the big win game performance. On the other hand, whether or not a melody pattern contradiction occurs is determined by randomly selecting a melody pattern, so even if a melody pattern contradiction does not occur, there is still a possibility that the promotion effect will be executed. Therefore, even if there is no contradiction in the melody pattern of the initially temporarily selected music, the promotion effect may be executed after the temporarily selected music is output, so that the player can execute the promotion effect after the temporarily selected music is output. You can enjoy the jackpot game while expecting that.

The initial provisionally selected music output processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2501>
The MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether any one of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON. do. If the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2507, and if the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the process proceeds to step S2507. It shifts to S2502.

<Steps S2502 to S2506>
If the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag set in step S3913 of FIG. 61 or S4313 of FIG. 69 is set to ON. (step S2502).

Here, if the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is off (step S2502: No), that is, if the player has not set the melody pattern, the MPU 51 sets the default setting melody pattern 2 for the temporarily selected music. (see FIG. 38) is selected (step S2503), the speaker 26 is caused to output the initially provisionally selected music from the chorus (step S2504), and the initial provisionally selected music output processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the temporarily selected melody pattern flag is ON (step S2502: Yes), that is, if the player has set a melody pattern, the MPU 51 sets melody pattern 1 ( (see FIG. 38) is selected (step S2505), the speaker 26 is caused to output the initially tentatively selected music from the A melody (the beginning of the song) (step S2506), and the initial tentatively selected music output processing is terminated.

<Step S2507>
When the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 selects a melody pattern from a plurality of predetermined melody patterns (two in this embodiment) for outputting the initially temporarily selected music from the speaker 26. is randomly selected (step S2507). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a contradiction in the melody pattern (the output start portion) is to be generated when the promotion effect is scheduled to be performed. Determined by a random lottery of melody patterns, regardless of whether it is set to Thereby, the MPU 51 can generate a contradiction in the melody pattern (the output start portion) when it is planned to perform the promotion effect.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern of the initially tentatively selected music determined in step S2507 is melody pattern 1 or not. When melody pattern 1 is selected (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial provisionally selected music from the A melody (singing part) (step S2506), and executes the initial provisionally selected music output process. finish. On the other hand, when melody pattern 2 is selected (step S2508: No), the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 to output the initial provisionally selected music from the chorus (step S2504), and terminates the initial provisionally selected music output process.

It should be noted that in the initial temporary selection music output process of FIG. Instead of selecting patterns at random, as in step S2804 in the selected music output process in FIG. You may make it draw lots of.

[Music selection process]
Here, FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection process (step S2220 in FIG. 23). In the song selection process, the player selects a song to be output in the jackpot game, and when the player selects a song, processes such as outputting the selected song are executed.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the upper selection button 211 has been operated based on the upper selection button operation data (see FIG. 18B).

When the upper selection button 211 is operated (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and when the upper selection button 211 is not operated (step S2601: No), the process shifts to step S2603. do.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 executes cursor movement display processing for moving upward the cursor image 836 indicating the temporarily selected music piece. For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated in the initial music selection image 83 shown in FIG. Moves to music A one above from . As a result, the music selection image 83 for music A is changed from the already selected music image 831 to the provisionally selected music image 832 . When the cursor movement display processing is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2605.

<Step S2603>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lower selection button 212 has been operated based on the lower selection button operation data (see FIG. 18C).

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2604 if the down selection button 212 has been operated (step S2603: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2606 if the down selection button 212 has not been operated (step S2603: No). do.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 executes unselected music image movement display processing for moving the unselected music image 833 downward. For example, when the down selection button 212 is operated in the music selection image 83 shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 51 moves the unselected music images 833 for music E, music F, music G, music H, and music K downward. . At this time, while the unselected music image 833 for the music L is deleted, the music selection image 83 for the music T is newly displayed as the provisionally selected music image 832, so that the provisionally selected music is changed from the music P to the music T. Be changed.

In this way, the player can change the provisionally selected song to the already selected song by operating the upper selection button 211 and can select the provisionally selected song from the unselected songs by operating the lower selection button 212 . Therefore, as described above, the player can change the provisionally selected song image 832 in the song selection image 83 by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, thereby allowing the player to select previously selected songs. , and unselected music that has not been selected before, the target music can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 executes provisionally selected music output processing for outputting the provisionally selected music from the speaker 26, and ends the music selection processing. The details of the temporarily selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated based on the enter button operation data (see FIG. 18F). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated by determining whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated based on whether or not the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON. to decide. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2607 when the enter button 21B is operated (step S2606: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2610 when the enter button 21B is not operated (step S2606: No).

<Steps S2607 to S2609>
When the enter button 21B is operated (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the enter operation counter (step S2607). The determination operation counter determines whether or not it is the first song determination in the song selection valid period of the jackpot game (for example, the period during which the 1R opening and closing execution mode is executed) in step S2802 in the selected song output process of FIG. 41 described later. It is referred to when judging In addition, the MPU 51 executes a selected music output process for outputting the music selected by the player from the speaker 26 (step S2608), and performs a music selection button effect for executing the music selection button effect in response to the operation of the decision button 21B at the time of selection. Processing is executed (step S2609). Details of the selected music output process will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the music selection button effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music selection valid period has passed. When the music selection effective period has passed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2611. On the other hand, if the music selection valid period has not passed (step S2610: No), the MPU 51 ends the music selection process. That is, until the song selection valid period elapses, the song selection processing flag that is set to ON in step S2306 in the song selection image display process of FIG. 24 is not set to OFF (step S2612). During the period, determination of whether or not the enter button 21B is operated in step S2606 is repeatedly performed. In other words, it is possible to select a song (change the selected song) a plurality of times during the song selection valid period. Also, during this music selection valid period, since the selection of music is enabled by operating the enter button 21B, the music selection button effect (expectation degree suggesting effect (suggestive effect 1 to suggestive effect 8), it is also a period in which the variable probability fixed effects (fixed effects 1 to 4) and the reserved continuous-station fixed effects (fixed effects 2 and 4)) can be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probability variable confirmation effect, and the reservation Renso confirmation effect is restricted within the music selection valid period. Thus, by limiting the execution timing of the music selection button effect, it is possible to suppress unnecessary operation of the decision button 21B for confirming whether the music selection button effect is to be executed.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the music selection valid period has passed (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 performs music selection counter data update processing for updating data based on the music selection by the player in order to display the already selected music image 831 in the music selection image 83. At the same time (step S2611), the music selection processing in progress flag is set to OFF (step S2612), and the music selection processing is terminated. Details of the song selection counter data update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Temporarily selected song output process]
Here, FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the temporarily selected music output process (step S2605 in FIG. 39). In the temporarily selected music output process, when the temporarily selected music is changed by the operation of the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 by the player, a process of outputting the temporarily selected music from the speaker 26 is executed. In this provisionally selected music output process, the provisionally selected music is normally output from the speaker 26 in the default setting melody pattern. As shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern defines the output start portion when the temporarily selected music is output from the speaker 26 as described above (see FIG. 38). A pattern can be set (melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. 61 or melody pattern setting history screen processing in FIG. 69). When the player has set a melody pattern different from the default setting, the initially provisionally selected music is output from the speaker 26 with the melody pattern set by the player.

Furthermore, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (the promotion effect is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game effect) and the temporarily selected music is an unselected music, the melody pattern is randomly selected. , a contradiction can arise regarding the melody pattern. For example, if the default melody pattern is set and the output start portion of the temporarily selected music is the chorus, if the promotion effect flag is set to ON and the temporarily selected music is an unselected music, In some cases, the output start portion of the temporarily selected music piece is different from the chorus portion, for example, the start portion of the music piece (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing part)). Randomly selecting a melody pattern has the same meaning as performing a contradictory output lottery (step S2803 of the selected music output process in FIG. 41 described later).

In this way, when there is an output contradiction in the output start portion of the provisionally selected music (contradiction of the melody pattern), the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is announced before the provisionally selected music is output. It establishes an outcome that is more favorable to the player than the implied outcome. Therefore, when an output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) occurs in the output start portion of the provisionally selected music, the player can, for example, play a 5R probability variable jackpot game in which the current game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state. It can be known that it is either a state or a 16R probability variable jackpot game state, or that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variable jackpot game state.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there was no contradiction in the melody pattern when the temporarily selected music was output. For this reason, the conventional gaming machine cannot sufficiently arouse the player's interest in the act of provisionally selecting a song or the effect of outputting the provisionally selected song. The music may not even be changed from the initially provisionally selected music.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp in advance that the promotion effect will be executed by the confirmation effect that the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music is inconsistent. Therefore, the player performs the act of temporarily selecting a song, and at that time, pays attention to the melody pattern of the temporarily selected song, so that the player can confirm whether the final effect will be executed or not. You can fully enjoy the act of temporarily selecting songs that you could not. In addition, even if the performance is not interesting to the player in the conventional game machine, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by generating a contradiction in the melody pattern on the condition that the temporarily selected music is an unselected music, the player is motivated to actively perform the act of temporarily selecting the music, and the player is encouraged to perform the act of temporarily selecting the music. Unselected music can be positively provisionally selected. As a result, even when the player finally selects a song from the already-selected songs, the player can be motivated to listen to the unselected songs in the process up to that point, and the player can It is possible to secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected songs.

The temporarily selected music output processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2701>
In step S2701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is set to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether any one of the first promotion effect flag, the second promotion effect flag, and the third promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON. do.

Here, if the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2702, and if the promotion effect flag is set to OFF (step S2701: No), The process moves to step S2703.

<Step S2702>
In step S2702, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an unselected song has been provisionally selected. If the unselected music is provisionally selected (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2703, and if the unselected music is not provisionally selected (step S2702: No), the process shifts to step S2708. do.

<Steps S2703 to S2707>
In step S2703, the MPU 51 determines whether the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag set in steps S3913 of FIG. 61 and S4313 of FIG. 69 is set to ON.

Here, if the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is off (step S2703: No), that is, if the player has not set a melody pattern, the MPU 51 sets the default setting melody pattern 2 for the temporarily selected music. (see FIG. 38) is selected (step S2704), the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus to the speaker 26 (step S2705), and the initial provisionally selected music output processing ends.

On the other hand, if the temporarily selected music melody pattern setting flag is ON (step S2703: Yes), that is, if the player has set a melody pattern, the MPU 51 sets melody pattern 1 (Fig. 38) is selected (step S2506), the temporarily selected music is output from the A melody (singing part) to the speaker 26 (step S2707), and the initial temporarily selected music output processing is terminated.

<Step S2708>
When the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes) and the temporarily selected music is an unselected music (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs the temporarily selected music from the speaker 26. A melody pattern is randomly selected from a plurality of melody patterns (two in this embodiment) (step S2708). That is, the MPU 51 allows the player to make a provisional request as to whether a contradiction in the melody pattern (output start portion) should be generated on the condition that an unselected musical piece is provisionally selected when a promotion effect is scheduled to be performed. Regardless of whether or not the melody pattern of the selected music is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting, the melody pattern is determined by random lottery. Thereby, the MPU 51 can generate a contradiction in the melody pattern (the output start portion) when it is planned to perform the promotion effect.

In the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, the melody pattern is randomly selected on condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON and the unselected music is temporarily selected (step S2701: Yes and step S2702: Yes). (Step S2708), instead of randomly selecting a melody pattern, a lottery is conducted to determine whether output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) of the output start portion of the initially tentatively selected music piece of the melody pattern is to be performed. You may do so. In addition, in the present embodiment, when an unselected song is selected, the melody pattern is randomly drawn regardless of whether or not the temporarily selected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON by the player. When the selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, priority is given to the player's setting, and the provisionally selected music may always be output with a melody pattern different from the default setting. That is, in the non-default state in which the provisionally-selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, inconsistency in the output of the provisionally-selected music is prevented, and the melody is set only in the default state in which the player has not set the melody pattern. Contradictions in patterns may occur. Conversely, in the non-default state in which the provisionally selected musical composition melody pattern setting flag is set to ON, output contradiction of the provisionally selected musical composition is generated, and in the default state in which the player has not set the melody pattern. , the melody patterns may not contradict each other.

In the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, a melody pattern is randomly selected each time an unselected music is temporarily selected. Although there is no particular limitation on the upper limit number, it is set to about 1 to 5 times, for example. By setting an upper limit on the number of times the melody pattern is randomly selected in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily repeatedly provisionally selecting an unselected song. In addition, in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40, contradiction may occur in the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music on the condition that the unselected music is temporarily selected. You may make it produce a contradiction in a pattern. For example, a contradiction may occur in the melody pattern on the condition that the already-selected music is provisionally selected. In addition, a contradiction of melody patterns may be generated when any of the selected music and the unselected music is provisionally selected. In this way, even if a player who does not know the conditions under which the melody pattern of the provisionally selected musical piece in the game machine 10 contradicts the melody pattern, the melody pattern of the provisionally selected musical piece can be contradicted. Since it can be done, the amusement of the jackpot game is improved.

[Selected music output process]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output process (step S2609 in FIG. 39). In the selected music output process, a process of outputting the selected music from the speaker 26 is executed when a music is selected by the decision operation of the decision button 21B by the player. In this music output process, the selected music is usually output from the speaker 26 in the default melody pattern. As shown in FIG. 38, the melody pattern defines the output start portion when music is output from the speaker 26 as described above. Default settings are provided. The default setting of the melody patterns of the selected songs is set to melody pattern 1 for all songs A to T, that is, the output starts from the A melody (the beginning of the song). In the unselected songs, the default setting of the melody pattern is set to melody pattern 2 for all songs A to T, that is, the output starts from the chorus. Note that the default setting for all songs A to T in the already selected songs is melody pattern 1, but the default setting for some or all of the songs may be melody pattern 2. FIG. Further, in the unselected songs, the default setting is melody pattern 2 for all songs A to T, but the default setting for some or all songs may be melody pattern 1. FIG.

As for the melody pattern of the selected music, the player can set a melody pattern different from the default setting for each of the selected music and the unselected music (melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. 61 or FIG. 69 melody pattern setting history screen processing). When the player sets a melody pattern different from the default setting, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 in the melody pattern set by the player. For example, when the selected music is the already selected music, the output is started from the melody pattern 2 different from the default setting, and when the selected music is the unselected music, the output is started from the melody pattern 1 different from the default setting. .

Furthermore, in the selected music output process, when the selected music is an unselected music in the first music selection in the music selection valid period (for example, the opening and closing execution mode of the first round), and the promotion effect flag is set to ON. Then (when promotion performance is scheduled to be executed in the jackpot game performance), a contradiction output lottery is performed to randomly select a melody pattern, thereby causing a contradiction with respect to the melody pattern. For example, if the melody pattern is set to the default and the output start portion of the selected song is the chorus, if the promotion effect flag is set to ON and the selected song is an unselected song, the selection The output start part of the music may be a part different from the chorus part, for example, the start part of the music (intro part (prelude part) or A melody part (singing part)). Note that performing the contradictory output lottery has the same meaning as randomly selecting a melody pattern (step S2507 of the initial provisionally selected music output process in FIG. 37 and step S2708 of the provisionally selected music output process in FIG. 40).

When output contradiction (contradiction of melody pattern) occurs in the output start portion of the selected music piece in this way, it is suggested that the promotion effect is executed, that is, the result of the jackpot lottery is suggested before the selected music piece is output. It is determined that the result is more advantageous for the player than the result that is set. Therefore, when an output contradiction (melody pattern contradiction) occurs in the output start portion of the selected song, the player is in a 5R probability variable jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state, for example. and 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state, or 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state.

By the way, as a conventional game machine, there was no contradiction in the melody pattern when the selected music was output. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine cannot sufficiently arouse the player's interest in the act of selecting a song or the effect of outputting the selected song. sometimes not.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp in advance that the promotion effect will be executed by the confirmation effect that the melody pattern of the selected music is inconsistent. Therefore, the player performs the act of selecting a song, and at that time, pays attention to the melody pattern of the selected song, so that the player can confirm whether the fixed effect will be executed or not. You can fully enjoy the act of selecting songs that you couldn't do. In addition, even if the performance is not interesting to the player in the conventional game machine, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, so that the player can fully enjoy the jackpot game. In addition, by generating a contradiction in the melody pattern on the condition that the selected song is an unselected song, the player is motivated to actively perform the action of selecting a song, and the player is not selected. Music can be positively provisionally selected. As a result, the player can be motivated to listen to the unselected music, and an opportunity can be secured to tell the player how good the unselected music is.

The selected music output process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2801>
In step S2801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected song selected by the player's operation of the enter button 21B is an unselected song. If the selected music is an unselected music (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2802, and if the selected music is not an unselected music, that is, if the selected music is an already selected music (step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2810.

<Step S2802>
In step S2802, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the song is determined for the first time during the song selection valid period of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 in FIG. 39), which is incremented by 1 due to the music determination operation on the determination button 21B, is 1 or not.

Here, if the music is determined for the first time (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2803. : No), the process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not any of the first promotion effect flag, second promotion effect flag, and third promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON. . If any promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2803: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2804, and if any promotion effect flag is not set to ON (step S2803: No ), and the process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2804>
At step S2804, the MPU 51 performs a contradictory output lottery. Inconsistent output means that when the melody pattern is set by default, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 with a melody pattern different from the default setting, and when the melody pattern is set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. means to output the selected music from the speaker 26 in the default setting melody pattern. In this embodiment, the contradictory output lottery is executed by selecting an unselected song when any one of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (steps S2801 and S2803: Yes ). Therefore, the player can, for example, the current game state is 5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R which are more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state due to the contradiction in the output of the music when the unselected music is selected. It can be known that it is either a variable probability big winning game state or a 16R variable probability big winning game state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R variable probability big winning game state. Therefore, the decision operation for selecting an unselected song can be enjoyed not only as an act of selecting a song, but as an act of confirming whether or not the player is in an advantageous jackpot game state. As a result, the player can be motivated to actively select the unselected music and listen to the unselected music, thereby securing an opportunity to tell the player how good the unselected music is.

In addition, by limiting the contradictory output lottery to the determination of the first song only (step S2802: Yes), the player can unnecessarily repeat unselected songs for the purpose of executing the song selection button effect in the jackpot game state. can be suppressed. It should be noted that the number of times the inconsistency output lottery is performed in step S2802 is not limited to once per one jackpot game, and may be performed twice or more. However, it is preferable to set the upper limit of the number of contradictory output lotteries per one jackpot game from the viewpoint of suppressing unnecessarily repeated selection of unselected songs.

In addition, in step S2804, the contradiction output lottery indicates that an unselected song is selected (step S2801: Yes), that the song is determined for the first time (step S2802: Yes), and the first to third promotion effect flags. is set to ON (step S2803: Yes). Conditions can also be excluded. That is, the contradictory output lottery may be performed with the minimum condition that any one of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON, and in this case, the contradictory output is a probability change from the 5R normal jackpot to the 5R probability variable jackpot. Promotion, 16R promotion from a 5R variable probability jackpot to a 16R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variable promotion from a 5R normal jackpot to a 16R probability variable jackpot are meaningful as performances that clearly indicate that the state is advantageous to the player. In addition, by setting the selection of an unselected song as a condition for the contradictory output lottery, the player who wants to confirm that he or she is in an advantageous state by the contradictory output will select the unselected song. You can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected songs to On the other hand, by setting the condition of the contradiction output lottery to be the first music determination, the selection of music is unnecessary for checking whether or not the contradiction output is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. Repetition can be suppressed.

<Step S2805>
At step S2805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the contradictory output lottery has been won. The process moves to step S2809.

<Steps S2806 to S2808>
If the contradictory output lottery is won (step S2805: Yes), in step S2806 the MPU 51 turns on the unselected music melody pattern setting flag set to on in step S3913 of FIG. 61 or step S4313 of FIG. determine whether there is When the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2806: Yes), the MPU 51 sets melody pattern 1 different from melody pattern 2 which is the default setting (see FIG. 38). , melody pattern 2, which is the default setting, is selected to perform contradictory output (step S2807). On the other hand, when the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to OFF (step S2806: No), that is, when the default setting melody pattern 2 is set (see FIG. 38), the MPU 51 executes inconsistent output. To do so, melody pattern 1 different from the default setting is selected (step S2808).

<Step S2809>
If the selected song is an unselected song (step S2801: Yes), if the song is not determined for the first time (if the song is determined for the second time or later) (step S2802: No), or the first to third promotion effects If none of the flags are set to ON (step S2803: No), the MPU 51 in step S2809 sets the unselected music melody pattern setting flag to ON without executing the contradictory output lottery (step S2804). determine whether there is Also, in step S2809, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON even when the contradictory output lottery is not won (step S2805: No). When the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 51 sets melody pattern 1 different from melody pattern 2 which is the default setting (see FIG. 38). , selects melody pattern 1 that outputs the selected music from the A melody (singing part) without executing contradictory output (step S2808). On the other hand, when the unselected music melody pattern setting flag is set to OFF (step S2809: No), that is, when the default setting melody pattern 2 is set (see FIG. 38), the MPU 51 executes inconsistent output. Instead, the default setting melody pattern 2 to be output from the chorus of the selected music is selected (step S2807).

<Step S2810>
If the selected song is not an unselected song (if the selected song is an already selected song) (step S2801: No), in step S2810 the MPU 51 determines the already selected song set in step S3913 of FIG. 61 or step S4313 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the melody pattern setting flag is set to ON. When the already-selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON (step S2810: Yes), that is, when the melody pattern 2 different from the default setting is set, the MPU 51 does not execute the contradictory output, and does not output the selected music. The melody pattern 2 to be output from the chorus of is selected (step S2807). On the other hand, when the already selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to OFF (step S2809: No), that is, when the default setting melody pattern is set, the MPU 51 does not execute contradiction output, A melody pattern 1 to be output from the A melody (singing part) is selected (step S2808).

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the melody pattern of the selected music is selected (step S2807 or S2808), the MPU 51 outputs the selected music with the selected melody pattern from the speaker 26 (step S2811), and updates the memory of the selected music (step S2812). , the selected music piece output process ends. By updating the storage of the selected music when the music is selected, even if the music is selected a plurality of times during the effective period of the music selection, the last selected music can be identified during the effective period of the music selection. . In addition, since the last selected song can be specified in the song selection effective period, the song order of the already selected songs in the song selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) can be updated based on the finally selected song.

In the selected music output process shown in FIG. 41, the contradictory output lottery is performed when an unselected music is selected, but the contradictory output lottery may be performed when an already selected music is selected. Also in this case, when the contradictory output lottery is won, for example, the current game state is either the 5R probability variable jackpot game state or the 16R probability variable jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R normal jackpot game state, or It can be known that the 16R probability variable jackpot game state is more advantageous to the player than the 5R probability variable jackpot game state. Further, even when performing a contradictory output lottery when an already-selected song is selected, it is preferable to set an upper limit to the number of contradictory output lotteries. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily and repeatedly selecting the already-selected music in the jackpot game state.

[Music selection button effect processing]
Here, FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing (step S2609 in FIG. 39). In the song selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. If so, the music selection button performance is determined, and the determined music selection button performance is executed. The song selection button effect is an expectation level suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be executed, and a probability variable confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect will be executed. That is, in the song selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect is executed later, the expectation level suggesting effect and the probability variation confirmation effect are executed according to the music determination operation.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, when a decision operation is performed on the decision button 21B for deciding a song, a suggestive effect or a promotional effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the promotional effect will be executed is executed. There was nothing to execute a variable fixed production that clearly indicates. Therefore, the conventional gaming machines are unable to sufficiently arouse the player's interest in the action of selecting a song or the effect when the selected song is selected. sometimes not.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, since it is executed when music is selected, it is possible to grasp in advance the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be executed by the music selection button effect. Therefore, the player performs the act of selecting a song, and pays attention to the song selection button effect that is executed at that time. can enjoy. In addition, even if the performance is not interesting to the player in the conventional game machine, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, so that the player can fully enjoy the big winning game. In addition, by generating a contradiction in the melody pattern on the condition that the selected song is an unselected song, the player is motivated to actively perform the action of selecting a song, and the player is not selected. Music can be positively provisionally selected. As a result, the player can be motivated to listen to the unselected music, and an opportunity can be secured to tell the player how good the unselected music is.

The music selection button effect processing having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2901>
In step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected song selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B is an unselected song. If the selected music is an unselected music (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2902, and if the selected music is not an unselected music, that is, if the selected music is an already selected music (step S2901: No), the music selection button effect processing ends without executing the music selection button effect.

Here, by determining in step S2901 whether or not an unselected music piece is determined, a music selection button effect can be executed on the condition that an unselected music piece is selected. Therefore, the song selection button production (expectation level suggestion production (suggestion production 1 to suggestion production 8) shown in FIG. A player who desires the performance 4)) can be made to actively select an unselected song. As a result, it is possible for the player to listen to a wide variety of songs prepared in advance to be output in the special game state.

In this embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that an unselected music is selected, but the music selection button effect may be executed even when an already selected music is selected. . Then, the operation of the selection determining unit 21 for selecting music is not only an act of simply selecting music, but can also be enjoyed as an act of executing a music selection button effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player positively select the music, increase the degree of attention to the jackpot game, increase interest in the jackpot game, and improve the player's willingness to play.

<Step S2902>
In step S2902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the song is determined for the first time during the song selection valid period of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the determination operation counter (see steps S2606 and S2607 in FIG. 39), which is incremented by 1 due to the music determination operation on the determination button 21B, is 1 or not. If the music is determined for the first time (step S2902: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2903. , the music selection button effect processing is terminated without executing the music selection button effect.

Here, in step S2902, by determining whether or not it is the first song determination, the number of times the song selection button effect is executed is limited to one for the first song determination when an unselected song is selected. be done. As a result, when the song selection button presentation is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily and repeatedly selecting songs without sufficiently listening to unselected songs in the jackpot game state.

It should be noted that the number of times the music selection button effect is executed is not limited to once per jackpot game, and may be executed twice or more. However, it is preferable to set an upper limit number (for example, 2 to 5 times) for the number of music selection button effects for one jackpot game from the viewpoint of suppressing unnecessarily repeated selection of unselected music.

<Step S2903>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON. When the first promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2904, and when the first promotion effect flag is not set (step S2903: No), the process is started. The process moves to step S2805.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 51 includes a suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot gaming state is a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state, and a song selection button production that includes a 5R probability variable confirmation production that indicates that the 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing is executed. The details of the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2905>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag set to ON in step S2003 of FIG. 19 is set to ON. When the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is set to ON (S2905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2906, and the second promotion effect flag and the third promotion effect flag are turned ON. If not set (step S2905: No), the music selection button effect processing is terminated without executing the music selection button effect.

In the music selection button effect processing of FIG. 42, the music selection button effect can be executed on the condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON. may be executed at However, when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF, as the music selection button effect, only the suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is the probability variable jackpot game state is executed, and the probability variable jackpot game state is executed. There is no chance that the probability variable finalized effect that clearly indicates that is will be executed.

<Step S2906>
In step S2906, the MPU 51 is a song selection button effect including a suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is a 16R probability variable jackpot game state, and a 16R probability variable confirmation effect that indicates that the 16R probability variable jackpot game state 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing is executed. Details of the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<S2907>
When the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process or the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process is executed (step S2904 or S2906), the MPU 51 sets the promotion effect flag set to off (step S2907).

<Steps S2908 and S2909>
In step S2908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not no effect (see FIGS. 45 and 48) is selected in the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process or the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process. When no effect is selected (step S2908: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect processing without executing the music selection button effect. On the other hand, if no production is selected (step S2908: No), the MPU 51 executes the music selection button production selected in the 5R probability variation music selection button production determination process or the 16R probability variation music selection button production determination process (step S2909), The song selection button effect processing is terminated.

Here, the music selection button effect processing is executed when the music selection processing flag is set to ON (steps S2219: Yes and S2220 in FIG. 23). That is, the music selection button effect processing is executed for the first music selection operation until the music selection effective period elapses. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary repetition of music selection for confirming whether or not the music selection button effect will be executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music.

[5R probability variation song selection button effect determination process]
Here, FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process (step S2904 in FIG. 42). In the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process, the music selection button effect (including no effect) to be executed when music is selected by the decision operation on the decision button 21B during the music selection valid period is determined. Below, before explaining the 5R probability variation music selection button production determination process, for determining the music selection button production table showing the expectations of various music selection button productions shown in FIG. 44 and the 5R probability variation music selection button production lottery table shown in FIG. The 5R probability variable music selection button effect lottery table will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 44, the music selection button effect table defines suggestive effects 1 to 8 and fixed effects 1 to 4 corresponding to the degree of expectation (probability variable expectation) for the probability variable jackpot as types of music selection button effects. Suggestion performances 1 to 8 are expectations suggestion performances suggesting the degree of expectation that the big win that triggered the transition to the big win gaming state is a variable probability big win. On the other hand, fixed productions 1 to 4 are productions that indicate that the big win that triggered the transition to the big win game state is a variable probability big win, and are fixed productions with a probability variable expectation of 100%.

Suggestion effect 1 is a effect in which a mini-character A is displayed on the pattern display section 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability variation expectation is a effect of 10%.

Suggestion effect 2 is a effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to blue by operating the decision button 21B when selecting music, and the probability variation expectation is 10% effect.

Suggestion effect 3 is a effect in which mini-character B is displayed on pattern display section 341 by operating decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability variation expectation level is 20% effect.

Suggestion effect 4 is a effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to yellow by operating the enter button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability variation expectation is 20% effect.

Suggestion effect 5 is a effect in which mini-characters A and B are displayed in the pattern display section 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability variation expectation is 30% effect.

Suggestion effect 6 is a effect in which the cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the temporarily selected music image 832 changes to red by operating the decision button 21B when selecting music, and the probability variation expectation is 50% effect.

Suggestion effect 7 is a effect in which mini-character C is displayed on pattern display section 341 by operating decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and is effect with probability variation expectation of 66%.

Suggestive production 8 is a production in which mini-characters A, B and C are displayed on the pattern display unit 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection, and the probability variation expectation is 80%. It is a performance.

Confirmation effect 1 is an effect in which a cursor image 836 (see FIG. 25) surrounding the provisionally selected music image 832 changes to a rainbow color by operating the decision button 21B at the time of selecting a song, which triggers the transition to the jackpot game state. It is a 5R probability variable fixed production that clearly indicates that the big hit is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

The confirmation effect 2 is an effect in which a special mini-character is displayed on the pattern display section 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of selection of music, and that the big win that triggered the transition to the big win game state is the 5R probability variable big win. It is a definite variable fixed production to be specified. In addition, the fixed effect 2 is a jackpot (5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) as success/failure information in any of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the information indicating is included, that is, when the jackpot game ends and the game state shifts to the time saving mode, the reservation series that generates the jackpot by the second reservation is executed. It is also a confirmed performance.

Confirmation production 3 outputs a special operation sound (for example, a high-pitched operation sound such as "picone") that is different from the normal operation sound when the decision button 21B is operated during music selection by operating the decision button 21B when selecting music. It is a 16R probability variable fixed production that clearly indicates that the big win that triggered the shift to the big winning gaming state is a 16R probability variable big win.

Confirmation effect 4 is a effect in which a special operation sound is output and a special mini character is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 by operating the decision button 21B at the time of song selection, and the big win that triggered the transition to the big win game state. is a definite variable fixed effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R definite variable jackpot. In addition, the fixed effect 4 is a jackpot (5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) as success/failure information in any of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the information indicating is included, that is, when the jackpot game ends and the game state shifts to the time saving mode, the reservation series that generates the jackpot by the second reservation is executed. It is also a confirmed performance.

In addition, although the reservation renso confirmation effect also corresponds to the probability variable confirmation effect, the music selection button effect setting screen processing (see FIGS. 66 and 67) and the music selection button effect setting history screen processing (see FIGS. 73 and 74) will be described later. See), it is defined separately from the probability variable fixed effect.

As shown in FIG. 45, the 5R probability variable music selection button effect lottery table is referred to when the decision button 21B is operated within the music selection valid period in the 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51, and stores eight lottery tables A1 to A8. In each table A1 to A8, the relationship between the music selection button effect lottery counter stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 and the effect type is defined, and the music selection button effect can be determined according to the count value of the music selection button effect lottery counter. has been Tables A1 to A4 do not allocate song selection button effect lottery counters to suggestion effects 1 to 8 that indicate the degree of probability variation expectation that the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, tables A5 to A8 have allocation of song selection button effect lottery counters for suggested effects 1 to 8, and there is a possibility that any of suggested effects 1 to 8 will be determined. In addition, in the 5R probability variable music selection button production lottery table, since it is referred to in the 5R probability variable jackpot game state, the fixed production 3 and the fixed production 4 that indicate the 16R probability variable jackpot are not defined.

Specifically, the table A1 is a table in which only "no effect" is determined in which the 5R probability variation music selection button effect is not executed even when the enter button 21B is operated during music selection. That is, in the table A1, none of the "suggestive effects 1" to "suggestive effects 8", "fixed effects 1" and "fixed effects 2" are selected as the music selection button effects.

The table A2 is a table in which only "no effect" or "fixed effect 2", which is a probability variable fixed effect and a reservation fixed effect, is determined by operating the decision button 21B at the time of music selection. That is, in the table A2, "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8" and "confirmation effect 1" are not selected as music selection button effects.

The table A3 is a table in which "no effect" or "fixed effect 1", which is a probability variable fixed effect, is determined by operating the decision button 21B when selecting music. That is, in the table A3, "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8" and "confirmation effect 2" are not selected as music selection button effects.

The table A4 is a table in which "no effect", "fixed effect 1" or "fixed effect 2" is determined by operating the enter button 21B when selecting music. That is, in table A4, "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8" are not selected as music selection button effects.

The table A5 is a table in which "no effect" or "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8" are determined by operating the decision button 21B when selecting music. That is, in the table A5, the "fixed effect 1" and the "fixed effect 2" are not selected as the music selection button effects.

The table A6 is a table in which "no effect", "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8" or "fixed effect 2" is determined by operating the decision button 21B when selecting music. That is, in the table A6, the "fixed effect 1" is not selected as the music selection button effect.

The table A7 is a table in which "no effect", "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8" or "fixed effect 1" is determined by operating the enter button 21B when selecting music. That is, in the table A7, the "confirmation effect 2" is not selected as the music selection button effect.

The table A8 is a table for determining "no effect", "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8", "fixed effect 1", or "fixed effect 2" by operating the decision button 21B when selecting music. . That is, in the table A8, any one of "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8", "fixed effect 1" and "fixed effect 2" can be selected as the music selection button effect.

Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of a 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table determination table defines conditions for selecting tables A1 to A8, and is referred to in the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. The 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game setting and the pending Renso flag and the tables A1 to A8. The game setting is a setting made by the player as to whether or not to execute each of the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probability variable confirmation effect, and the reservation consecutive residence confirmation effect. When the player has set not to execute the expectation degree suggesting effect, the expectation level is set in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen process of FIG. 66 or step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. A suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. Similarly, according to the setting by the player, in step S4113 in the music selection button effect setting screen process of FIG. 66 or step S4513 in the music selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. A fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. On the other hand, the reserved consecutive house flag indicates that the reserved consecutive house is to be executed, and is set to ON in step S2205 in FIG.

In the 5R probability variable music selection button effect lottery table determination table, for example, the table A1 in which only "no effect" is determined has an expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag as game settings, a probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag is on, If the reservation Renso fixed effect non-execution setting flag is ON and the reservation Renso flag is ON, or if the expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is ON, the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag is ON, and the reservation Renso flag is ON Selected when off. It should be noted that tables A2 to A8 are selected when the game setting flag and the reserved consecutive house flag satisfy the conditions shown in FIG. 46, similarly to table A1.

<Step S3001>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 43, in the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process, in step S3001, the MPU 51 turns on the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag that is set to on in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. determines whether it is set to That is, the MPU 51 is set so as not to execute the expectation degree suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the game state is the 5R probability variable jackpot game state or the 16R probability variable jackpot game state even if the decision button 21B at the time of music selection is operated. It is determined whether or not the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is made. When the expectation level suggesting effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the expectation level suggesting effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3002 and If the non-execution of the suggestive effect is set to OFF (the non-execution of the expectation level suggestive effect is not set) (step S3001: No), the process proceeds to step S3012.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable probability fixed effect non-execution setting flag set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. 73 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 is a setting that does not execute a variable probability confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the game state is the 5R probability variable jackpot game state or the 16R probability variable jackpot game state even if the decision button 21B at the time of music selection is operated. It is determined whether or not performance non-execution setting is made. If the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3003, When the execution setting flag is set to OFF (when the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting is not performed) (step S3002: No), the process proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the pending consecutive house flag indicating execution of the reserved consecutive house set to ON in step S2205 of FIG. 23 is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3004 if the reserved consecutive villa flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and if the reserved consecutive residence flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No), the process proceeds to step S3004. to step S3005.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, when the pending consecutive villa flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 51 does not execute the pending consecutive villa confirmation effect set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. Determine whether the setting flag is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is a setting for non-execution of a reservation consecutive villa confirmation effect, which is a setting not to execute a reservation consecutive villa confirmation effect indicating that a reservation consecutive villa will be performed. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3005 when the reservation consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (when the reservation consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3004: Yes), If the setting flag for the non-execution of the reservation consecutive villa confirmation effect is set to OFF (the setting for the non-execution of the reservation confirmation effect is not set) (step S3004: No), the process proceeds to step S3007.

<Steps S3005 and S3006>
In step S3005, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery on the table A1 (see FIG. 45) which selects "no effect" regardless of which value of the button lottery random number counter is selected. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (probability variation If the fixed effect non-execution setting is set (step S3002: Yes), the pending consecutive villa flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and the pending continuous residential fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON ( If the setting for non-execution of the reservation fixed production is set (step S3004: Yes), the table A1 is selected as the 5R probability variation music selection button production lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, in step S3005, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is turned ON. Even if it is set (probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3002: Yes), and the reservation renso flag is set to off (step S3003: No), table A1 as a 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table is selected (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery is performed on the table A1 (step S3005), the MPU 51 sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 51 executes a song selection button effect lottery on the table A2 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the "fixed effect 2", which is the 5R probability variable fixed effect and the reserved Renso fixed effect, exists. do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (probability variation When the fixed effect non-execution setting is set (step S3002: Yes), the pending consecutive villa flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), and the pending continuous residential fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF ( If the setting for non-execution of the reservation Renso fixed effect is not set (step S3004: No), the table A2 is selected as the 5R probability variable music selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery on the table A2 (step S3007), it sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3008>
In step S3008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the pending consecutive house flag indicating execution of the reserved consecutive house set to ON in step S2205 of FIG. 23 is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3009 if the reserved consecutive villa flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), and if the reserved consecutive residence flag is set to OFF (step S3008: No), the process proceeds to step S3009. to step S3010.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the setting flag for non-execution of the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect, which is set to ON in step S4113 of FIG. 66 or step S4513 of FIG. 73, is set to ON. When the holding consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3010, and the holding consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. If there is (step S3009: No), the process proceeds to step S3011.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 51 executes the music selection button effect lottery in the table A3 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter for selecting the 5R probability variable fixed effect "fixed effect 1" exists. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (probability variation The fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3002: No), the reservation consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), and the reservation continuous residence confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. In this case (when the reservation Renso fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3009: Yes), table A3 is selected as the 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, in step S3010, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is turned OFF. It is set (probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting is not made) (step S3002: No), even if the reservation flag is set to off (step S3008: No), 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table Select table A3 as (see FIG. 46). It should be noted that, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A3 is performed (step S3010), the MPU 51 sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3011>
In step S3011, the MPU 51 executes a music selection button effect lottery using the table A4 (see FIG. 45) in which the values of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "fixed effect 1" and "fixed effect 2" exist. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3001: Yes), and sets the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (probability variation The fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3002: No), the reservation consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), and the reservation continuous residence confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. In this case (when the setting for non-execution of the reservation Renso confirmation effect is not set) (step S3009: No), the table A4 is selected as the 5R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery on the table A4 (step S3011), it sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3012>
When the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON in step S3012. If the variable probability fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3012: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3013, and if the variable probability fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF (step S3012: No), the process proceeds to step S3017.

<Step S3013>
In step S3013, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved consecutive house flag is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3014 if the reserved consecutive villa flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), and if the reserved consecutive residence flag is set to OFF (step S3013: No), the process proceeds to step S3014. to step S3015.

<Step S3014>
In step S3014, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the setting flag for non-execution of the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect is set to ON. When the holding consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3014: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3015, and the holding consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. If there is (step S3014: No), the process proceeds to step S3016.

<Step S3015>
In step S3015, the MPU 51 executes a music selection button effect lottery using the table A5 (see FIG. 45) in which the values of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8" are present. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag to ON. (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3012: Yes), the pending consecutive house flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), and the pending continuous fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON. In the case (when the reservation Renso fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3014: Yes), the table A5 is selected as the 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, in step S3015, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting) (step S3012: Yes), even when the reservation flag is set to off (step S3013: No), 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table Select table A5 as (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table A5 is performed (step S3015), the MPU 51 sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3016>
In step S3016, the MPU 51 executes a music selection button effect lottery on the table A6 (see FIG. 45) in which the values of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8" and "fixed effect 2" exist. do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag to ON. (Probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3012: Yes), the pending consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), and the pending continuous fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. If it is (when the setting for non-execution of the reservation Renso confirmation effect is not set) (step S3014: No), the table A6 is selected as the 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery on the table A6 (step S3016), it sets the pending Renso flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3017>
When both the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag and the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag are set to OFF (No in steps S3001 and S3012), the MPU 51 determines whether the pending consecutive house flag is set to ON. (step S3017). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3018 if the reserved consecutive villa flag is set to ON (step S3017: Yes), and if the reserved consecutive residence flag is set to OFF (step S3017: No), the process proceeds to step S3018. to step S3019.

<Step S3018>
In step S3018, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the setting flag for non-execution of the reservation continuous villa confirmation effect is set to ON. When the holding consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (step S3018: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3019, and the holding consecutive villa confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF. If there is (step S3018: No), the process proceeds to step S3020.

<Step S3019>
In step S3019, the MPU 51 executes the song selection button effect lottery in the table A7 (see FIG. 45) in which the values of the button lottery random number counter for selecting "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8" and "fixed effect 1" exist. do. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. Then (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3012: No), the reservation consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3017: Yes), and the reservation consecutive residence confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON If it is set (if the reservation Renso fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3018: Yes), the table A7 is selected as the 5R probability variable music selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, in step S3019, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3012: No), even if the reservation flag is set to off (step S3017: No), the 5R probability variation song selection button Table A7 is selected as the effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the MPU 51 performs the music selection button effect lottery in the table A7 (step S3019), it sets the pending Renso flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Step S3020>
In step S3020, the MPU 51 selects "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8", "fixed effect 1", and "fixed effect 2" in the table A8 (see FIG. 45) in which the value of the button lottery random number counter exists. A song selection button effect lottery is executed. That is, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3001: No), and sets the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag to OFF. Then (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3012: No), the reservation consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3017: Yes), and the reservation consecutive residence confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF If it is set (when the setting for non-execution of the reservation Renso confirmation effect is not set) (step S3018: No), the table A8 is selected as the 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table (see FIG. 46). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery is performed in the table A8 (step S3020), the MPU 51 sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3006), and ends the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

[16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process]
Here, FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process (step S2906 in FIG. 42). In the 16R probability variation song selection button effect determination process, the music selection button effect executed when the decision button 21B is operated based on the 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table for determining the 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. (including no production). The 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process is basically the same as the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process described above, and in the 5R probability variation music selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. A8” can be read as “table B1” to “table B8”.

Also, the 16R probability variable music selection button effect lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B within the music selection valid period in the 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table is stored in the RAM 512 of the MPU 51, and stores eight lottery tables B1 to B8. The 16R probability variation music selection button production lottery table is basically the same as the 5R probability variation music selection button production lottery table, but "fixed production 3" is specified instead of "fixed production 1" in the 5R probability variation music selection button production lottery table. , and "fixed effect 4" is defined instead of "fixed effect 2". That is, in the 16R probability variable music selection button effect lottery table, since it is referred to in the 16R probability variable big hit game state, the fixed effect 1 and the fixed effect 3 that indicate the 5R probability variable big win are not defined. A detailed description of the 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table will be omitted.

Also, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a 16R variable probability music selection button effect lottery table determination table. The 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table determination table defines conditions for selecting tables B1 to B8, and is referred to in the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process shown in FIG. The 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table determination table defines the relationship between the game setting and reservation flag and the tables B1 to B8. Incidentally, the game setting and the pending Renso flag are synonymous with the case of the 5R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table determination table. In the 16R variable probability music selection button effect lottery table determination table, for example, the table B1 (see FIG. 48) in which only “no effect” is determined has the expectation degree suggestion effect non-execution setting flag turned on as the game setting, and the probability variable fixed effect non-execution If the setting flag is ON, the pending Renso fixed effect non-execution setting flag is ON, and the pending Renso flag is ON, or the expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting flag is ON, the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag is ON, and Selected when the pending Renso flag is off. It should be noted that tables B2 to B8 are selected when the game setting flag and the reserved consecutive house flag satisfy the conditions shown in FIG. 49, similarly to table B1.

<Steps S3101 to S3107>
Returning to the description of FIG. 47, in the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process, the MPU 51 sets the expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation level suggestion effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), The fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3102: Yes), the pending continuous residence flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), When the execution setting flag is set to ON (when the setting for non-execution of the reservation fixed production effect is set) (step S3104: Yes), any button lottery random number counter is used as the 16R probability variable music selection button production lottery table. is selected, the table B1 (step S3105) (see FIG. 48) for selecting "no effect" is selected (see FIG. 49). In addition, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (probability variable Even if the fixed effect non-execution setting is set (step S3102: Yes), and the reservation flag is set to off (step S3103: No), the table B1 is selected as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table ( Step S3105) (see FIG. 49). It should be noted that, when the music selection button effect lottery is performed in the table B1 (step S3105), the MPU 51 sets the reserve flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

On the other hand, in step S3107, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is turned ON. set (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting) (step S3102: Yes), the pending consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), and the pending continuous fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to OFF If there is (when the setting for non-execution of the reservation fixed production is not set) (step S3104: No), the 16R fixed production selection button production lottery table is the 16R fixed production fixed production and the reservation production fixed production “fixed production 4” button Selects the table B2 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). It should be noted that, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B2 is performed (step S3107), the MPU 51 sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3108-3111>
In addition, in step S3110, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is turned OFF. is set (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3102: No), the pending consecutive house flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), and the pending continuous fixed effect non-execution setting flag is turned ON If it is set (holding Renso fixed effect non-execution setting) (step S3109: Yes), as a 16R probability variable fixed effect lottery table, "fixed effect 3" which is a 16R probability variable fixed effect The button to be selected selects the table B3 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). In addition, in step S3110, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is turned OFF. Even if it is set (the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3102: No), and the reservation flag is set to off (step S3108: No), the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table Select table B3 as (see FIG. 49). It should be noted that, when the music selection button effect lottery is performed in the table B3 (step S3110), the MPU 51 sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

On the other hand, in step S3111, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to ON (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is performed) (step S3101: Yes), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is turned OFF. is set (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3102: No), the reservation consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), and the reservation consecutive residence confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is turned OFF When it is set (when the setting for non-execution of the fixed effect of the reservation renso is not set) (step S3109: No), "fixed effect 3" and "fixed effect 4" are set as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table. The button to be selected selects the table B4 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). It should be noted that, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B4 is performed (step S3111), the MPU 51 sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3112 to S3116>
In step S3115, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is ON. (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3112: Yes), the reservation consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3113: Yes), and the reservation consecutive residence confirmation effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON If yes (step S3114: Yes), select "suggestion effect 1" to "suggestion effect 8" as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table Select the table B5 in which the value of the button lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). In addition, in step S3115, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to on (probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting) (step S3112: Yes), even if the reservation flag is set to off (step S3113: No), 16R probability variation music selection button effect lottery table Select table B5 as (see FIG. 49). In addition, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B5 is performed (step S3115), the MPU 51 sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

On the other hand, in step S3116, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is set) (step S3112: Yes), the pending consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3113: Yes), and the pending continuous fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set When it is set to off (when the setting for non-execution of the reservation fixed production is not set) (step S3114: No), as the 16R probability variation song selection button production lottery table, "suggestive production 1" to "suggestive production 8 ' and 'Fixed effect 4' Select the table B6 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). It should be noted that, when the music selection button effect lottery in the table B6 is performed (step S3116), the MPU 51 sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

<Steps S3117 to S3120>
At step S3117, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is OFF. is set (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3112: No), the reservation consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3117: Yes), the reservation consecutive residence fixed effect non-execution setting flag is ON is set (holding Renso fixed effect non-execution setting) (step S3118: Yes), "suggestive effect 1" to "suggestive effect 8" and "confirmed effect 3” button Selects the table B7 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). Further, in step S3117, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (the probability variation fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3112: No), even if the reservation flag is set to off (step S3117: No), the 16R probability variation song selection button Table B7 is selected as the effect lottery table (see FIG. 49). It should be noted that, when the music selection button effect lottery is performed in the table B7 (step S3119), the MPU 51 sets the pending Renso flag to OFF (step S3106), and terminates the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

On the other hand, in step S3120, the MPU 51 sets the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag to OFF (the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3101: No), and the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting is not set) (step S3112: No), the reserved consecutive residence flag is set to ON (step S3117: Yes), the reserved consecutive residence fixed effect non-execution setting flag is set to off (when the setting for non-execution of the reservation confirmation effect is not set) (step S3118: No), as the 16R probability variation song selection button effect lottery table, “suggestion effect 1” to “suggestion effect 8", "Fixed effect 3", and "Fixed effect 4" Select the table B8 in which the value of the lottery random number counter exists (see FIG. 49). It should be noted that, when the music selection button effect lottery in table B8 is performed (step S3120), the MPU 51 sets the reservation flag to OFF (step S3106), and ends the 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination process.

[Music selection counter data update process]
Here, FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the song selection counter data update process (step S2611 in the song selection process of FIG. 39). In the music selection counter data update process, the data necessary for the music selection image display process (see FIG. 24) and the initial temporary selection music determination process (FIG. 35) are updated according to the music selection status by the player during the music selection valid period of the jackpot game. The song selection counter data table (see FIG. 29) is updated. As a result, it becomes possible to create a list of selected songs (see (A) of FIG. 30) and a list of non-selected songs (see (B) of FIG. 30) necessary for displaying the song selection image 83 (see FIG. 25). Together with this, it becomes possible to create initial sequence data (see FIG. 31). As a result, by updating the music selection counter data in the music selection counter data updating process, the music selection image 83 displayed in the next big win game reflects the music selection situation by the player in the current big win game. The music selection image 83 is highly operable for the player to select music.

<Step S3201>
In step S3201, the MPU 51 determines whether there is an initial provisionally selected song that can be temporarily stored in the RAM 512 in step S2304 in the song selection image display process of FIG. If step S3201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3102, and if there is no initially provisionally selected song stored (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3106.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the music determined by the MPU as the initial provisionally selected music (step S2404 in FIG. 35) has been selected as the selected music by the player. (S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3106, and if the initial tentatively selected song is not selected (step S3202: No), the process proceeds to step S3103.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
In step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) regarding non-selected songs in the song selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512. FIG.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 51(A1) and 51(A2), in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. When the music F is not selected by the user, the music F is stored in the first place in the non-selected music list order, and the second and third places in the non-selected music list order are the non-selected music lists before updating, respectively. The song I with song number 9 that was ranked first and the song B with song number 2 that was ranked second are stored. In addition, among the non-selected songs ranked 3rd in the non-selected song list order before the update, the song C with the song number 3 having the oldest non-selected date and time is set to the 0th place and changed to the unselected song.

Also, in step S3203, the MPU 51 updates the non-selection flag. For example, when the non-selected music list ranking is updated from FIG. 51(A1) to FIG. This is done by setting the selection flag to OFF and setting the non-selection flag to ON for the song F whose non-selection song list order has been changed from 0th to 1st. When the data (see FIG. 29) related to the non-selected songs in the song selection counter data table is updated (step S3203), the memory of the initially provisionally selected songs stored in the RAM 512 is cleared (step S3204).

<Step S3205>
At step S3205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is a selected song that can be stored in the RAM 512 at step S2812 in the selected song output process of FIG. The process proceeds to step S3106, and if there is no selected song stored (step S3205: No), the song selection counter data update process ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
In step S3206, the MPU 51 updates the data (see FIG. 29) regarding the already-selected music in the music selection counter data table stored in the RAM 512. FIG.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 51(B1) and 51(B2), in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. adds 1 to the counter for the number of times music E has been selected. Also, the song E is stored as the first selected song list order, and the song number 1, which was ranked first in the selected song list order before updating, is stored in the second and third places of the already selected song list order. The song A and the song D of song number 4, which was ranked second, are stored. In addition, the song D with the song number 4, which has the oldest selection date and time among the already-selected songs that were ranked 3rd in the list of already-selected songs before the update, is changed to the 0th place and changed to the unselected song.

Also, in step S3205, the MPU 51 updates the already selected flag. For example, when the unselected music list order is updated from FIG. 51(B1) to FIG. This is done by setting the flag off and setting the already selected flag of the song E whose order of already selected song list changed from 0th to 1st to on. When the data (see FIG. 29) related to the selected music in the music selection counter data table is updated (step S3206), the MPU 51 clears the storage of the selected music stored in the RAM 512 (step S3207), and resets the music selection counter. End the data update process.

Note that when a song is selected from the non-selected songs, the song is changed from the non-selected song to the already selected song. For example, in FIG. 51(A1), when the song B whose non-selected song ranking is second is selected, the first selected song ranking data is changed to the song B. FIG. On the other hand, in the non-selected song ranking data, the song B is deleted from the second place, the song C in the third place is moved up to the second place, and the third place is updated as no corresponding song. In addition, the non-selected flag of song B is set to OFF, and the already-selected flag of song B is set to ON. That is, when a song is selected from the non-selected songs, information about the non-selection of the song is cleared in the song selection counter data, while information indicating that the song is already selected is included. Add is performed.

Further, when the order of the already-selected music list is determined by the selection frequency instead of the newest selection date and time, the data regarding the already-selected music is updated based on the selection frequency counter of the music E. FIG. For example, in the state of the music selection counter data table shown in FIG. There is no change in the selected song list order. Therefore, the MPU 51 does not change the already-selected music list order and the already-selected flag. In addition, in the case where the order list rank of already selected music pieces is determined by the frequency of selection, if there is a change in the order of the list of already selected music pieces, the selected music pieces are updated according to the same procedure as in the case of updating the data about the already selected music pieces in the order of the newest selection date and time. The list ranking and already selected flag are updated.

[Game setting processing]
Here, FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process (step S1711 in FIG. 15). In the game setting process, during a period in which the game round effect and the jackpot game effect are not executed, the jackpot is determined according to the player's operation of the selection determination unit 21 (a plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B). A game setting for the game effect is executed.

By the way, as a conventional game, the player can make game settings related to various effects executed using the symbol display section 341, the speaker 26, etc., such as selection of characters appearing in game round effects and jackpot game effects. be. In such a gaming machine, the player can customize the performance to suit his or her tastes by performing game settings related to various performances, such as selecting a favorite character. You can enjoy the game performance even more.

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a novel feature as a jackpot game effect as compared with the conventional gaming machine as described above. Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment displays an image including an already selected music image 831 and a non-selected music image 834 as the music selection image 83 in the pattern display section 341 in the jackpot game effect (see FIG. 25). ). Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the jackpot game, the initial temporary selection music When outputting provisionally selected music and selected music including . A song selection button performance is executed to suggest or specify the degree of expectation that promotion performance is executed in accordance with.

Then, in the game setting process shown in FIG. 52, the process is executed when the player sets the game for the jackpot game effect having a new feature compared to the conventional game machine. Specifically, in the game setting process, the music list display setting relating to display or non-display of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) on the music selection image display screen 82 is performed in accordance with the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21. , melody pattern setting for the provisionally selected music piece and the selected music piece, and music selection button effect setting for setting execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can set the music list display setting, the melody pattern setting, and the song selection button effect setting, which were not included in the conventional game setting items, as game settings for the jackpot game effect.

Here, in the music list display setting, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. Can be set to show or hide. As a result, the player can customize the music selection image 83 to a preferred display mode. In addition, the player can provisionally select and select songs without stress by setting the display mode to his liking by, for example, hiding information related to past song selections that the player determines to be unnecessary. be able to.

Also, in the melody pattern setting, melody patterns of provisionally selected songs and selected songs (unselected songs and already selected songs) can be set as described later with reference to FIGS. 62 and 70 and the like. As a result, the player can not only output the tentatively selected music and the selected music with the default settings, but can also output parts other than the default settings. As a result, the range of selection of the temporarily selected music and the output start portion of the selected music is widened, and the player can output the temporarily selected music and the selected music according to his/her own judgment. You can enjoy songs and selected songs.

Further, in the music selection button effect setting, it is possible to set whether or not to execute the music selection button effect as will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 and FIG. As a result, when the player has set the music selection button effect to be executed, the action executed by the music selection button effect (the operation of the decision button 21B in music selection, the possibility that the promotion effect will be executed) It can be enjoyed as an act to know On the other hand, if the player sets not to execute the song selection button effect, the player cannot know in advance whether the promotion effect will be executed or not. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the execution of Therefore, by being able to select whether or not to execute the music selection button effect setting, it is possible to enjoy the game in accordance with the taste of the player as to whether or not the promotion effect is performed.

The game setting process having such technical significance will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. However, before describing the game setting process shown in FIG. 52, an example of transition of the display screen in the game setting process will be described first with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. FIG. It should be noted that, in the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, even if a predetermined time has passed since the stop display of the main symbol 921, the transition to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B)), the demo screen, and the power saving screen, which will be described later, will not occur. , a fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53A), which will be described later, is maintained, and game settings are enabled after a predetermined time has passed since the fluctuation stop screen 92 was displayed. Of course, the game setting may be enabled immediately after the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed. Alternatively, the screen may be moved to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53(B)).

As shown in FIG. 53(A), when the variable display of the main symbol 921 is stopped, the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are "0", and the main symbol 921 is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state. A change stop screen 92 in which the change of is stopped is maintained. When the player operates the operation button 20 after a predetermined time has passed since the fluctuation stop screen 92 was displayed, the display screen changes from the fluctuation stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. 53(B). Transition. This top menu screen 93 includes a plurality of selection images 931 to 935, a cursor image 936, and a selection determining portion image 937. FIG.

A plurality of selection images 931 to 935 on the top menu screen 93 are images for showing a plurality of selectable items and allowing the player to select a desired item from among the plurality of items. Further, the plurality of selection images 931 to 935 are also images for selecting the display screen of the transition destination. The plurality of selection images 931 to 935 include a selection image 933 of "game setting customization" for performing game settings during the jackpot game, and a selection image 935 of "end" for shifting from the top menu screen 93 to the fluctuation stop screen 92. including.

A cursor image 936 on the top menu screen 93 is an image indicating an item that is currently provisionally selected. In addition, the selection image 933 that is provisionally selected (the selection image 933 of "game setting customization" in FIG. 53(B)) is replaced by other selection images 931, 932, 932, 932, 932, 932, 932 in order to emphasize that provisional selection has been made. 934 and 935 are displayed in a distinguishable manner. This point is the same as the temporarily selected music image 832 (see FIG. 25) in the music selection image 83 described above.

A selection determining portion image 937 on the top menu screen 93 is an image imitating the selection determining portion 21 (see FIG. 1), and indicates that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection determining portion 21. It is an image. In the selection determination part image 937, the characters "select" are attached to the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, and the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are emphasized. are displayed. Also, the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. In addition, in the selection decision portion image 937, the character "OK" is attached to the image corresponding to the decision button 21B, indicating that the operation should be performed when the provisionally selected item is selected. The display example of the selection determination portion image 937 is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 53B, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the top menu screen 93, when any item (selected images 931 to 935) is selected from a plurality of items by the player by operating the decision button 21B, the display screen corresponding to the selected item is displayed. Transition. For example, when the player selects the selection image 933 of "game setting customization", the game setting screen 94 shown in FIG. 53(C) is displayed. This game setting screen 94 includes a plurality of selection images 941 to 945, a cursor image 936, and a selection determination portion image 937. FIG. Note that the cursor image 936 and the selection/decision portion image 937 are the same as in the case of the top menu screen 93, so description thereof will be omitted. In the following also, when the cursor image 936 and the selection/decision portion image 937 of the top menu screen 93 are the same, the same reference numerals are attached and the description thereof is omitted.

A plurality of selection images 941 to 945 of the game setting screen 94 indicate a plurality of selectable items (display screens to be shifted to) and are used to prompt the player to select a desired item from among the plurality of items. It is an image. The plurality of selection images 941 to 945 include a selection image 943 of "normal music selection setting", a selection image 944 of "setting history music selection setting", and a selection image 945 of "return to top menu".

Here, FIG. 54(A) shows an example of the game setting screen 94 similarly to FIG. 53(C), and FIGS. 54(B), 54(C) and 54(D) respectively show It is an example of a display screen that transitions from the game setting screen 94 . Specifically, FIG. 54(B) is an example of the setting item selection screen 95, FIG. 54(C) is an example of the setting history selection screen 96, and FIG. 54(D) is similar to FIG. 2 is an example of the top menu screen 93. FIG. That is, in the game setting screen shown in FIG. 54(A), when the selection image 943 of "normal music selection setting" is selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting item selection screen 95, and the "setting When the selection image 944 of "History music selection setting" is selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. When selected, the display screen shifts from the game setting screen 94 to the above-described top menu screen 93 shown in FIG. 54(D). The setting item selection screen 95 will be described below with reference to FIG. 55, and the setting history selection screen 96 will be described with reference to FIG.

The setting item selection screen 95 shown in FIG. 55 is a screen that enables individual selection of items related to music selection in the jackpot game. This setting item selection screen 95 includes a plurality of selection images 951-955. A “melody pattern” selection image 951 is an image that is selected when setting a melody pattern among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 951 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97 . A selection image 952 of "music list display" is an image that is selected when performing music list display setting among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 952 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98 . The selection image 953 of "music selection button effect" is an image to be selected when setting the music selection button effect among the music selection setting items. When the selection image 953 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99 . A selection image 954 of "return one" is an image that is selected when returning the display screen by one. When the selection image 954 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54A) which is the display screen before shifting to the setting item selection screen 95 . A “return to top menu” selection image 955 is an image that is selected when returning the display screen to the top menu screen 93 . When the selection image 955 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)).

The setting history selection screen 96 shown in FIG. 56 is a screen that displays the setting history of items related to music selection in the winning game, and enables individual selection of items related to music selection in the big winning game. This setting history selection screen 96 includes a plurality of selection images 961-965. The selection image 961 of "melody pattern setting history" is an image to be selected when setting the melody pattern based on the setting history of the melody pattern. When the selection image 961 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the melody pattern setting history screen 87 . The selection image 962 of "music list display setting history" is an image that is selected when performing music list display settings based on the setting history of the music list display. When the selection image 962 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen 88 . The selection image 963 of "music selection button effect setting history" is an image to be selected when setting the music selection button effect based on the setting history of the music selection button effect. When the selection image 963 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 . A selection image 964 of "return one" is an image that is selected when returning the display screen by one. When the selection image 964 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 (FIG. 54(A)) which is the display screen before shifting to the setting history selection screen 96 . A “return to top menu” selection image 965 is an image that is selected when returning the display screen to the top menu screen 93 . When the selection image 965 is selected, the display screen shifts from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)).

<Step S3401>
Returning to the description of FIG. 52, at step S3401 in the game setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53A). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to ON when the value of the variable display counter updated in the counter update process (step S1707) in FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 depending on whether or not the fluctuation stop screen display flag that is set to ON in the screen transition process is ON.

If the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3402, and if the display screen is not the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S3401: No), shifts the process to step S3403. do.

<Step S3402>
At step S3402, the MPU 51 executes a game start waiting process and ends the game setting process. Details of the game start waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3403>
In step S3403, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON in the top menu screen transition processing such as step S3504 of the game start waiting processing in FIG. 57 described later and step S3711 of the game setting screen processing in FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 93 based on whether or not it is on. If the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3404, and if the display screen is not the top menu screen 93 (step S3403: No), shifts the process to step S3405.

<Step S3404>
At step S3404, the MPU 51 executes top menu screen processing and terminates the game setting processing. Note that the top menu screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3405>
At step S3405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54A). Specifically, the MPU 51 turns on the game setting screen display flag that is set to on in the game setting screen transition process such as step S3609 of the top menu screen process of FIG. 58 and step S3813 of the setting item selection process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 94 based on whether or not. If the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3406, and if the display screen is not the game setting screen 94 (step S3405: No), shifts the process to step S3407. do.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 51 executes game setting screen processing and terminates the game setting processing. Details of the game setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54B and 55). Specifically, the MPU 51 displays a setting item selection screen that is set to ON in setting item selection screen transition processing such as step S3707 of game setting processing in FIG. 59 and step S3907 of melody pattern setting screen processing in FIG. It is determined whether the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 based on whether the flag is on. If the display screen is the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3408. transition to

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 51 executes setting item selection processing and ends the game setting processing. Details of the setting item selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3409>
At step S3409, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern setting screen display flag, which is set to ON in the melody pattern setting screen transition process of step S3807 in the setting item selection process of FIG. It is determined whether the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 or not. If the display screen is the melody pattern setting screen 97 (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3410; transition to

<Step S3410>
At step S3410, the MPU 51 executes melody pattern setting screen processing, and terminates the game setting processing. Note that the melody pattern setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3411>
In step S3411, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the music list display setting screen display flag, which is set to ON in the music list display setting screen transition process of step S3809 in the setting item selection process of FIG. to determine whether the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 or not. If the display screen is the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3412, and if the display screen is not the music list display setting screen 98 (step S3411: No), the process continues. The process moves to step S3413.

<Step S3412>
In step S3412, the MPU 51 executes music list display setting screen processing, and terminates the game setting processing. Details of the song list display setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the music selection button effect setting screen display flag, which is set to ON in the music selection button effect setting screen transition process of step S3811 in the setting item selection process of FIG. Then, it is determined whether the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 or not. If the display screen is the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3414, and if the display screen is not the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (step S3413: No), the process continues. The process moves to step S3415.

<Step S3414>
At step S3414, the MPU 51 executes music selection button effect setting screen processing, and terminates the game setting processing. Details of the music selection button effect setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3415>
In step S3415, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54(C) and 56). Specifically, the MPU 51 performs step S4307 in the melody pattern setting history screen process in FIG. 69, which will be described later, step S4407 in the music list display setting history screen process in FIG. Whether or not the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 is determined based on whether or not the setting history selection screen display flag is turned on in the setting history selection screen transition processing of step S4507 in the screen processing. to decide. When the display screen is the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3416, and when the display screen is not the setting history selection screen 96 (step S3415: No), the process is shifted to step S3417. transition to

<Step S3416>
In step S3416, the MPU 51 executes setting history selection processing and terminates the game setting processing. Details of the setting history selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the melody pattern setting history screen display flag, which is set to ON in the melody pattern setting history screen transition process in step S4207 in the setting history selection process in FIG. to determine whether the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 or not. When the display screen is the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3418, and when the display screen is not the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (step S3417: No), the process is continued. The process moves to step S3419.

<Step S3418>
In step S3418, the MPU 51 executes melody pattern setting history screen processing, and terminates the game setting processing. Details of the melody pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3419>
In step S3419, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the music list display setting history screen display flag, which is set to ON in the music list display history screen transition process in step S4209 in the setting history selection process in FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 . If the display screen is the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3420, and if the display screen is not the music list display setting history screen 88 (step S3419: No), The process proceeds to step S3421.

<Step S3420>
In step S3420, the MPU 51 executes music list display setting history screen processing, and terminates the game setting processing. Details of the song list display setting history screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3421>
In step S3421, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag, which is set to ON in the music selection button effect history screen transition process of step S4211 in the setting history selection process of FIG. 68 to be described later, is ON. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 . If the display screen is the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3422, and if the display screen is not the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (step S3421: No), The process proceeds to step S3423.

<Step S3422>
In step S3422, the MPU 51 executes music selection button effect history screen processing, and terminates the game setting processing. Details of the music selection button effect history screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3423>
In step S3423, the MPU 51 causes the display screens to stop changing, the top menu screen 93, the game setting screen 94, the setting item selection screen 95, the setting history selection screen 96, the melody pattern setting screen 97, the music list display setting screen 98, and the music selection screen. If none of the button effect setting screen 99, the melody pattern setting history screen 87, the music list display setting history screen 88, and the music selection button effect setting history screen 89, another process corresponding to the current display screen is executed, and the game setting is performed. End the process.

[Game start waiting process]
Here, FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start waiting process (step S3402 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the game start waiting process, the display screen is changed from the fluctuation stop screen 92 (see FIG. 53(A)) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)) according to the operation of the operation button 20 by the player. ) is executed.

<Step S3501>
In step S3501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to change in the symbol display section 341. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation of the main symbol has started based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. It should be noted that the MPU 51 determines that the main symbol 921 has started to change when the value of the change display counter is not zero.

When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3501: Yes), it ends the game start waiting process, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3501: No ), and the process proceeds to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
In step S3502, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player based on the first to third operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18A). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has been operated (step S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3503, and when it determines that the operation button 20 has not been operated (step S3502: No), the game starts. End the standby process.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed after transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen 92. For example, when the fluctuation stop screen 92 is displayed (when the value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0), the MPU 51 starts counting by the clock counter, and refers to the value of the clock counter to display the fluctuation stop screen 92. It is possible to grasp the time since was displayed.

When the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has passed (step S3503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3504, and when it determines that the predetermined time has not passed (step S3503: No), the game start waiting process exit.

<Step S3504>
At step S3504, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation button 20 has been operated after a predetermined period of time since transition to the fluctuation stop screen 92 (step S3502: Yes and step S3503: Yes), so the operation of the operation button 20 by the player , the display screen is changed from the fluctuation stop screen 92 to the top menu screen 93 . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Top menu screen processing]
Here, FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen processing (step S3404 of game setting processing in FIG. 52). In the top menu screen processing, an item selected by the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 is selected from the plurality of selection images 941 to 945 displayed on the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)). A process of shifting the display screen to the corresponding screen is executed.

<Step S3601>
In step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to vary in the symbol display section 341 based on whether the value of the variation display counter is 0 or not. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3602, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3601: No). , the process proceeds to step S3603.

<Step S3602>
When the main symbol 921 starts to change (step S3601: Yes), the top menu screen display flag is set to OFF (step S3602), and the top menu screen processing is terminated.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(B)) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(C)), the MPU 51 It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the down selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3604. to step S3605.

<Step S3604>
If it is determined that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 performs temporary selection display change processing for changing the temporary selection display on the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)). (step S3604). For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated with the selection image 933 of "game setting customization" shown in FIGS. Move to the side of the selected image 932 which is one higher than 933 . At this time, the selected image indicating that the temporary selection is displayed is changed from the selected image 933 to the selected image 932 . On the other hand, when the down selection button 212 is operated while the selection image 933 of "game setting customization" is temporarily selected, the MPU 51 moves the cursor image 936 to the side of the selection image 934 one below the selection image 933. The selected image indicating that the selected image is temporarily selected and displayed is changed from the selected image 933 to the selected image 934 . When the process of step S3604 is finished, the MPU 51 finishes the top menu screen process.

Note that even if the left selection button 213 or right selection button 214 is operated when the display screen is the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)), the MPU 51 will Processing such as movement of the temporary selection display of the selection images 941 to 945 is not executed.

<Step S3605>
At step S3605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated by the player based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(F)).

If the MPU 51 determines that the decision button 21B has been operated (step S3605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3606, and if it determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S3605: No), the Ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3606>
In step S3606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "end" selection image 935 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)) on the top menu screen 93 has been selected by the player's operation of the enter button 21B. do. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "end". If the MPU 51 determines that the "end" selection image 935 has been selected (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3607, and if it determines that the "end" selection image 935 has not been selected (step S3606: No), the process proceeds to step S3608.

<Step S3607>
If the MPU 51 determines that the "end" selection image 935 has been selected (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)) to the fluctuation stop screen 92 ( 53A) is executed (step S3607). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF, sets the fluctuation stop screen display flag to ON, and terminates the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3608>
In step S3608, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 933 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)) of "game setting customization" on the top menu screen 93 has been selected by the player's operation of the enter button 21B. to judge. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "game setting customization". When the MPU 51 determines that the “game setting customization” selection image 935 has been selected (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3609 and determines that the “game setting customization” selection image 935 has not been selected. If so (step S3608: No), the process proceeds to step S3610.

<Step S3609>
If it is determined that the selection image 935 of "game setting customization" has been selected (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)) to the game setting screen. 94 (see FIGS. 53(C) and 54(A)) is executed (step S3609). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF, sets the game setting screen display flag to ON, and terminates the top menu screen processing.

<Step S3610>
In step S3610, when the item selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B is other than "end" and "game setting customization", the MPU 51 shifts to the display screen corresponding to the item selected by the player. . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off.

[Game setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game setting screen processing (step S3406 of game setting processing in FIG. 52). In the game setting screen process, in accordance with the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21, a setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 54(B)), a setting history selection screen, and a game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 54(A)) are displayed. A process of shifting the display screen to the screen 96 (see FIG. 54(C)) or the top menu screen (see FIG. 54(D)) is executed.

<Step S3701>
In step S3701, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to vary in the symbol display section 341 based on whether the value of the variation display counter is 0 or not. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3701: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3702, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3701: No). , the process proceeds to step S3703.

<Step S3702>
When the main symbol 921 starts to change (step S3701: Yes), the game setting screen display flag is set to OFF (step S3702), and the game setting screen process is terminated.

<Step S3703>
At step S3703, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(B)) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(C)), the MPU 51 It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the down selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3704, and when it determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S3703: No), the process to step S3705.

<Step S3704>
In step S3704, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is either the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, as in the temporary selection display change processing of step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. In response to this, a temporary selection display change process is executed to move the cursor image 936 and the temporary selection display one level up or down on the game setting screen 94 . When the process of step S3704 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S3705: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3706, and if it determines that the enter button 21B has not been operated (step S3705: No), the End the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 943 (see FIG. 54A) of "normal music selection setting" on the game setting screen 94 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "normal music selection setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 943 for "normal music selection settings" has been selected (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3707 and determines that the selection image 943 for "normal music selection settings" has not been selected. If so (step S3706: No), the process proceeds to step S3708.

<Step S3707>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 943 of "normal music selection setting" has been selected (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIGS. 53(C) and 54(A)) to the setting items. Setting item selection screen shift processing for shifting to the selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54B and 55) is executed (step S3707). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to ON, and terminates the game setting screen process.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 944 (see FIG. 54A) of "setting history music selection setting" on the game setting screen 94 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "setting history music selection setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 944 of "setting history music selection setting" has been selected (step S3708: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3709, and the selection image 944 of "setting history music selection setting" is not selected. If so (step S3708: No), the process proceeds to step S3710.

<Step S3709>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 944 of "setting history music selection setting" has been selected (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIGS. 53(C) and 54(A)). Setting history selection screen shift processing for shifting to the history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54C) is executed (step S3709). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and terminates the game setting screen process.

<Step S3710>
In step S3710, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 945 of "return to top menu" on the game setting screen 94 has been selected by the player's operation of the determination button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 945 has been selected (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3711 and determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 945 has not been selected. If so (step S3710: No), the process proceeds to step S3712.

<Step S3711>
If it is determined that the selection image 945 of "return to top menu" has been selected (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 94 (see FIGS. 53(C) and 54(A)) to the top menu screen. 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)) is executed (step S3711). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the game setting screen process.

<Step S3712>
In step S3712, when the item selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B is other than "normal music selection setting", "setting history music selection setting" and "return to top menu", the MPU 51 Move to the display screen corresponding to the item. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off.

[Setting item selection process]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the setting item selection process (step S3408 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). As shown in FIG. 55, in the setting item selection process, according to the item selected by the player's operation of the selection determination unit 21 from among the items related to music selection during the jackpot game displayed on the setting item selection screen 95, A process of shifting the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to various setting screens 97 to 99 is executed. In the following, setting item selection processing will be described by exemplifying a case where there are three music selection related items: melody pattern, music list display (music selection image 83), and music selection button effect. However, the music selection related items are not limited to the melody pattern, music list display (music selection image 83), and music selection button effect. For example, instead of some or all of the melody pattern, music list display (music selection image 83), and music selection button presentation, it is conceivable to allow the player to set other music selection related items. For example, other music selection-related items may include an initial provisionally selected music piece or fixing an initial provisionally selected music piece, which fixes the selected music piece according to settings made by the player.

<Step S3801>
In step S3801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to vary in the symbol display section 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3802, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3801: No). , the process proceeds to step S3803.

<Step S3802>
When the main symbol 921 starts to change (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the setting item selection screen display flag (step S3802), and terminates the setting item selection process.

<Step S3803>
In step S3803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 selects the upper selection button based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B and 18C). 211 or the lower selection button 212 is determined by the player.

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3803: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3804. to step S3805.

<Step S3804>
If it is determined that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the operated selection button 21A to the upper selection button in the same manner as the provisional selection display change processing of step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. 211 or down selection button 212, a temporary selection display change process is executed to move the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display one step up or down on the setting item selection screen 95 (step S3804). When the process of step S3804 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S3805: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3806, and if it determines that the enter button 21B has not been operated (step S3805: No), the End the game setting screen processing.

<Step S3806>
In step S3806, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 951 (see FIG. 55) of "melody pattern setting" on the setting item selection screen 95 has been selected by the player's operation of the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "melody pattern setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the "melody pattern setting" selection image 951 has been selected (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3807 and determines that the "melody pattern setting" selection image 951 has not been selected. If so (step S3806: No), the process proceeds to step S3808.

<Step S3807>
If it is determined that the selection image 951 of "melody pattern setting" has been selected (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the melody pattern setting screen 97 as shown in FIG. A melody pattern setting screen transition process is executed (step S3807). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF, sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to ON, and terminates the game setting screen process.

<Step S3808>
In step S3808, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 952 (see FIG. 55) of "music list display setting" on the setting item selection screen 95 has been selected by the player's operation of the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "music list display setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 952 for "music list display settings" has been selected (step S3808: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3809, and the selection image 952 for "music list display settings" is not selected. If so (step S3808: No), the process proceeds to step S3810.

<Step S3809>
If it is determined that the selection image 952 of "music list display setting" has been selected (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music list display setting screen 98 as shown in FIG. A song list display setting screen transition process to be transitioned is executed (step S3809). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF, sets the music list display setting screen display flag to ON, and terminates the setting item selection screen processing.

<Step S3810>
In step S3810, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 953 (see FIG. 55) of "music selection button effect setting" on the setting item selection screen 95 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "music selection button effect setting". When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 953 of "music selection button effect setting" is selected (step S3810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3811, and the selection image 953 of "music selection button effect setting" is not selected. If so (step S3810: No), the process proceeds to step S3812.

<Step S3811>
If it is determined that the selection image 953 of "music selection button effect setting" has been selected (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the music selection button effect setting screen 99 as shown in FIG. A music selection button effect setting screen transition process to be transitioned is executed (step S3811). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to OFF, sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to ON, and terminates the setting item selection screen processing.

<Step S3812>
In step S3812, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B to select the "return one" selection image 954 (see FIG. 55) on the setting item selection screen 95 or not. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the item "back by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the "back one step" selection image 954 has been selected (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3813 and determines that the "back one step" selection image 954 has not been selected. If so (step S3812: No), the process proceeds to step S3814.

<Step S3813>
When it is determined that the selection image 954 of "back one" has been selected (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the game setting screen 94 as shown in FIG. step S3813). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF and sets the game setting screen display flag to ON, and ends the setting item selection process.

<Step S3814>
When the item selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B is other than "melody pattern setting", "music list display setting", "music selection button effect setting" and "return one", the MPU 51 selects "top menu". Since it can be determined that "Return" has been selected, as shown in FIG. 55, top menu screen shift processing is executed to shift the display screen from the setting item selection screen 95 to the top menu screen 93 (step S3814). At this time, the MPU 51 turns off the setting item selection screen display flag and turns on the top menu screen display flag.

[Melody pattern setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting screen process (step S3410 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the melody pattern setting screen process, a process of setting the melody pattern (start of outputting music) of the temporarily selected music and the selected music output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game is executed. Also, FIG. 62 shows an example of the melody pattern setting screen 97 . In the following, the melody pattern setting screen 97 will be described first with reference to FIG. 62, and then the melody pattern setting screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 62, the melody pattern setting screen 97 is a screen for setting the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music in the jackpot game, and the unselected music and the already selected music as the selected music. . The melody pattern setting screen 97 includes a provisionally selected music setting image 971 , an unselected music setting image 972 , an already selected music setting image 973 , selection images 974 to 976 and a selection determining portion image 977 .

The temporarily selected music setting image 971 is an image for setting the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music. That is, the provisionally selected music setting image 971 is an image for setting whether output is started from the beginning of the song or from the chorus when the temporarily selected music is selected by the player. It has a song-beginning selection image for setting to start outputting from the first part and a chorus selection image for setting to start outputting from the chorus part.

The unselected music setting image 972 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected music is an unselected music. That is, the unselected music setting image 972 is an image for setting whether output is started from the beginning of the song or from the chorus when an unselected music is selected by the player. It has a song-beginning selection image for setting to start outputting from the first part and a chorus selection image for setting to start outputting from the chorus part.

The already-selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting a melody pattern when the selected music is the already-selected music. That is, the already-selected music setting image 973 is an image for setting whether output is started from the beginning of the song or from the chorus when the already-selected music is selected by the player. It has a song-beginning selection image for setting output from the beginning of the song, and a chorus selection image for setting output to be started from the chorus.

A plurality of selection images 974 to 976 are a selection image 974 of "back one" which is selected when returning the display screen by one to shift to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIGS. 54(B) and 55). A selection image 975 of "return to top menu" selected when the display screen is shifted to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)), and provisionally selected music, unselected music, and already selected music. A selection image 976 of "automatic" for causing the gaming machine 10 to set the output start of . In the present embodiment, when Random setting is performed by selecting the selection image 976 of "Random", the melody patterns of the provisionally selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music are all default settings.

The selection determination portion image 977 is an image that simulates the selection determination portion 21, and is an image that indicates that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection determination portion 21. FIG. In the selection determining portion image 977, the characters “select” are attached to the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214, and the selection buttons 211 to 214 The corresponding image is highlighted. Also, the images corresponding to the selection buttons 211 to 214 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. In addition, in the selection decision portion image 977, the character "OK" is attached to the image corresponding to the OK button 21B, indicating that the operation should be performed when the provisionally selected item is selected.

<Step S3901>
Returning to the description of FIG. 61, in step S3901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to vary in the symbol display section 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3902, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S3901: No). , the process proceeds to step S3903.

<Step S3902>
When the main pattern 921 starts to change (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the melody pattern setting screen display flag (step S3902), and terminates the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3903>
At step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 controls first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operation patterns. Based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player. to judge whether

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3904, and when it determines that the selection button 21A has not been operated (step S3903: No), the process to step S3905.

<Step S3904>
In step S3904, the MPU 51 makes a provisional selection on the melody pattern setting screen 97 according to which of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 the operated selection button 21A is. Temporary selection display change processing is executed to move the display to one of the up, down, left, and right directions. When the process of step S3904 is finished, the MPU 51 finishes the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S3905: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3906, and if it determines that the enter button 21B has not been operated (step S3905: No), the End the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3906>
In step S3906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B to select the "return one" selection image 974 (see FIG. 62) on the melody pattern setting screen 97 or not. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the "back one" selection image 974 has been selected (step S3906: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3907 and determines that the "back one" selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S3906: No), the process proceeds to step S3908.

<Step S3907>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 of "back one" has been selected (step S3906: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 54B). ) and FIG. 55) are executed (step S3907). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to ON, and terminates the melody pattern setting screen process.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "return to top menu" selection image 975 (see FIG. 62) on the melody pattern setting screen 97 has been selected by the player's operation of the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has been selected (step S3908: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3909 and determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has not been selected. If so (step S3908: No), the process proceeds to step S3910.

<Step S3909>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of "return to top menu" has been selected (step S3908: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the top menu screen 93 (FIGS. 53B and 53B). 54(D)) is executed (step S3909). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the melody pattern setting screen processing.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B to select the "automatic" selection image 976 (see FIG. 62) on the melody pattern setting screen 97 or not. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "automatic". If the MPU 51 determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has been selected (step S3910: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3911, and if it determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has not been selected (step S3910: No), the process proceeds to step S3912.

<Step S3911>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "automatic" has been selected (step S3910: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody patterns of the provisionally selected music, the unselected music and the already selected music as default (step S3911). Here, the default setting of the melody pattern is the melody pattern 2 in which the output starts from the chorus part for the tentatively selected music, and the output starts from the singing part (A melody part) for the already selected music as the selected music. The melody pattern 1 and the non-selected musical piece as the selected musical piece are the melody pattern 2 where the output starts from the chorus portion (see FIG. 38).

<Step S3912>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of "automatic" is not selected (step S3910: No), that is, if the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is any of "return one", "return to top menu" and "automatically". , the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the setting temporarily selected in the temporarily selected music setting image 971, the unselected music setting image 972, and the already selected music setting image 973 (step S3912). ). For example, when a determination operation is performed on the decision button 21B in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. The melody pattern 1 is set to start the output from the starting part (A melody part), and the melody pattern 2 to start the output from the chorus part is set for the already selected music as the selected music. At this time, the MPU 51 causes the RAM 512 to store the setting contents and setting time of the melody pattern. This makes it possible to display the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) in the melody pattern setting history screen processing of FIG. 69, which will be described later.

Thus, in step S3912, the player selects and determines the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the provisionally selected music piece and the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the unselected music piece and the already selected music piece as the selected music piece. This can be done by operating the unit 21 . Therefore, the player can choose whether to listen to the tentatively selected music and the selected music from the beginning, or to listen to the chorus part with the highest excitement, according to his/her preference. As a result, it becomes easier for the user to determine whether the temporarily selected music is his or her favorite music, and the selected music can be enjoyed in accordance with one's taste regardless of whether it is an unselected music or an already selected music.

<Step S3913>
At step S3913, the MPU 51 performs setting processing of a melody pattern setting flag according to the player setting. Specifically, the MPU 51 turns on the melody pattern setting flag for the item set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. Here, the melody pattern setting flag includes a provisionally selected music melody pattern setting flag for provisionally selected music, an unselected music melody pattern setting flag for unselected music, and an already selected music melody pattern setting flag for already selected music. For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 62, the unselected music melody pattern setting flag and The already selected music melody pattern setting flag is set to ON.

<Step S3914>
In step S3914, the MPU 51 executes top menu screen shift processing for shifting the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen 97 (see FIG. 62) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)). That is, when setting the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the melody pattern setting screen to the top menu screen 93 . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the melody pattern setting screen processing.

[Music list display setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting screen process (step S3412 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the music list display setting screen processing, a non-selected music image 834 for a disliked music (non-selected music) and an already selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for a favorite music (already selected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game are displayed. A process for performing display settings regarding the presence or absence of (display mode) is executed. 64(A) shows an example of the music list display setting screen 98, and FIGS. 64(B), 65(A) and 65(B) show an example of the display mode of the music selection image display screen 82. . In the following, the display modes of the music list display setting screen 98 and the music selection image display screen 82 will first be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

The music list display setting screen 98 shown in FIG. 64(A) is a screen for setting the display mode of the music selection image 83 (see FIG. 25) displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game. . The music list display setting screen 98 includes a disliked music selection image 981 and a favorite music selection image 982, as well as selection images 974 to 976 and a selection determination part image 977, like the melody pattern setting screen 97. FIG. Note that the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination portion image 977 are the same as in the case of the melody pattern setting screen 97, so description thereof will be omitted. In the following also, when the selection images 974 to 976 and the selection determination portion image 977 of the melody pattern setting screen 97 are the same, the same reference numerals are attached and the description thereof is omitted.

The disliked music selection image 981 is an image for setting whether or not to display the non-selected music image 834 (see FIG. 25) for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82 . The disliked music selection image 981 includes a display selection image selected when setting to display the unselected music image 834 and a non-display selection image selected when setting to hide the unselected music image 834. have. In this embodiment, "hide the non-selected music images 834" does not mean that the music selection images 83 for the non-selected music are not displayed, but rather that the music selection images 83 for the non-selected music are displayed as non-selected music. It means that they are displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be hidden, the music selection image display screen 82 is displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. 64(B).

Note that it is also possible to prevent the music selection image 83 for the non-selected music from being displayed when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be hidden. According to such another embodiment, when the non-selected music image 834 is set to be hidden, the non-selected music that was previously selected as the initial provisionally selected music but was not selected by the player is erroneously selected. You can avoid choosing

The favorite song selection image 982 is an image for setting whether or not to display the already selected song image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selected song (already selected song) on the song selection image display screen 82 . The favorite song selection image 982 includes a display selection image selected when setting to display the already selected song image 831 and a non-display selection image selected when setting to hide the already selected song image 831. have. In the present embodiment, "hiding the already-selected music image 831" does not mean that the music selection image 83 for the already-selected music is not displayed. It means that they are displayed without distinction in the same manner as the unselected music image 833 for the music. For example, when setting is made to hide the already-selected music image 831, the music selection image display screen 82 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(A).

Note that it is also possible to prevent the music selection image 83 for the already selected music from being displayed when the setting is made to hide the already selected music image 831 as another embodiment. According to such another embodiment, when the already-selected music image 831 is set to be non-display, it is possible to avoid repeatedly selecting the already-selected music previously selected by the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 65B, when both the unselected music image 834 and the already selected music image 831 are set to be hidden, the music selection images 83 other than the provisionally selected music image 832 are displayed in the same manner. be.

<Step S4001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 63, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to vary in the symbol display section 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4002, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4001: No). , the process proceeds to step S4003.

<Step S4002>
When the main symbol 921 starts to change (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the music list display setting screen display flag (step S4002), and ends the music list display setting screen process.

<Step S4003>
In step S4003, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 controls first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operation patterns. Based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player. to judge whether

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4004. to step S4005.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 51 temporarily selects the selected button 21A from the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 in the music list display setting screen 98. Temporary selection display change processing is executed to move the selection display to one of the up, down, left, and right directions. When the process of step S4004 ends, the MPU 51 ends the song list display setting screen process.

<Step S4005>
In step S4005, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S4005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4006, and if it determines that the enter button 21B has not been operated (step S4005: No), the End the music list display setting screen processing.

<Step S4006>
In step S4006, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 64A) of "back one" on the music list display setting screen 98 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the "back one" selection image 974 has been selected (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4007 and determines that the "back one" selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4006: No), the process proceeds to step S4008.

<Step S4007>
If it is determined that the selection image 974 of "back one" has been selected (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A) to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 64A). 54B and 55) is executed (step S4007). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to ON, and terminates the music list display setting screen process.

<Step S4008>
In step S4008, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 64A) of "return to top menu" on the music list display setting screen 98 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has been selected (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4009 and determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has not been selected. If so (step S4008: No), the process proceeds to step S4010.

<Step S4009>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of "return to top menu" has been selected (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 switches the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64A) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53). (B) and FIG. 54(D)) is executed (step S4009). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the music list display setting screen process.

<Step S4010>
In step S4010, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "Random" selection image 976 (see FIG. 64A) of the music list display setting screen 98 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "automatic". If the MPU 51 determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has been selected (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4011, and if it determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has not been selected (step S4010: No), the process proceeds to step S4012.

<Step S4011>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 976 of "Omakase" has been selected (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the non-selected music image 834 (see FIG. 25) for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82 (see FIG. 25). And the display setting of the already selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selected music (already selected music) is set to default (step S4011). Here, the default display setting is a setting in which both the unselected music image 834 and the already selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 25).

<Step S4012>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of "automatic" has not been selected (step S4010: No), that is, if the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is any of "return one", "return to top menu", and "automatically". , the MPU 51 displays the unselected music image 834 and the already selected music image 834 in the settings temporarily selected for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) and favorite selected music (already selected music). 831 (see FIG. 25) is set (step S4012). For example, when the determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 64A, the non-selected music image 834 is displayed and the selected music image 831 is set to be non-display. At this time, the MPU 51 causes the RAM 512 to store the setting content and the setting time of the music selection image 83 . This makes it possible to display the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) in the music list display setting history screen process of FIG. 71, which will be described later.

In this way, in step S4012, it is possible to display or hide the selected music image 831 and the non-selected music image 834 (disliked music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83. The music selection image 83 can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 . Thereby, the player can select the music to be output from the speaker 26 based on the music selection image 83 in the display mode set by the player. In addition, the player sets the already selected music image 831 not to be displayed, so that, for example, the already selected music image 831 corresponding to the already selected music selected in the past by the previous player is included in the music selection image 83. In some cases, the music selection image 83 that does not include the already selected music image 831 can be displayed. Similarly, the player can set non-display of the non-selected music images 834 so that, for example, the music selection image 83 includes the non-selected music images 834 for the non-selected music that the previous player has not selected in the past. In such a case, the music selection image 83 that does not include the non-selected music image 834 can be displayed.

<Step S4013>
In step S4013, the MPU 51 performs setting processing of the non-display setting flag according to the player setting. Specifically, the non-display setting flag is set to ON for the item set to "non-display" which is different from the default setting. Here, the non-display setting flags include non-selected music image non-display setting flags for disliked selected music (unselected music) and already selected music image non-display setting flags for favorite selected music (already selected music). For example, when a decision operation is performed on the decision button 21B in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. The visibility flag is set on.

<Step S4014>
In step S4014, the MPU 51 performs top menu screen transition processing for transitioning the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 (see FIG. 64(A)) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)). Run. That is, when the display settings for the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 are completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting screen 98 to the top menu screen 93 . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the music list display setting screen process.

[Song selection button effect setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting screen process (step S3414 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the music selection button effect setting screen process, a process for setting the music selection button effect that is executed when music is selected in the jackpot game is executed. Also, FIG. 67 shows an example of the music selection button effect setting screen 99 . In the following, the music selection button effect setting screen 99 will be described first with reference to FIG. 67, and then the music selection image display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

The music selection button effect setting screen 99 shown in FIG. 67 is a screen for setting the music selection button effect to be executed when music is selected in the jackpot game. The song selection button effect setting screen 99 includes an expectation level suggesting effect setting image 991, a probability change confirmed effect setting image 992, and a reservation fixed effect setting image 993, as well as selection images 974 to 976 and selection images 974 to 976 and selection similar to the melody pattern setting screen 97 and the like. It includes decision part image 977 .

The expectation degree suggestion effect setting image 991 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect at the time of music selection in the jackpot game. The expectation level suggesting effect setting image 991 includes an execution selection image (“execute” image) for setting execution of the expectation level suggesting effect, and a non-execution selection image ( "do not run" image). Note that the expectation degree suggesting effect is a effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the promotion effect will be executed as described above, and in this embodiment, the suggesting effects 1 to 8 described with reference to FIG. 44 correspond.

The variable probability confirmed effect setting image 992 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the variable probability confirmed effect when selecting a song in a jackpot game. This probability variation confirmed effect setting image 992 includes an execution selection image (“execute” image) for setting the probability variation confirmation effect to be executed, and a non-execution selection image (“do not execute”) for setting not to execute the probability variation confirmation effect ” image). Note that the variable probability confirmed effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the promotion effect is executed as described above, and corresponds to the confirmed effect 1 and the confirmed effect 3 described with reference to FIG. 44 in this embodiment.

The pending consecutive villa confirmation effect setting image 993 is an image for setting whether or not to execute the pending continuous villa confirmation effect when music is selected in the jackpot game. This reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect setting image 993 includes an execution selection image (“execute” image) for setting execution of the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect, and a non-execution image for setting not to execute the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect. It has a selection image (“do not run” image). Note that the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the reserved consecutive villas will be performed as described above, and in this embodiment, the confirmed effect 2 and the confirmed effect 4 described with reference to FIG. 44 correspond to this effect.

<Step S4101>
Returning to the description of FIG. 66, at step S4101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to vary in the symbol display section 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4102, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4101: No). , the process proceeds to step S4103.

<Step S4102>
When the main symbol 921 starts to change (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the music selection button effect setting screen display flag (step S4102), and terminates the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4103>
At step S4103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 controls first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operation patterns. Based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player. to judge whether

When the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4104. to step S4105.

<Step S4104>
In step S4104, the MPU 51 temporarily changes the music selection button effect setting screen 99 according to which of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 the operated selection button 21A is. Temporary selection display change processing is executed to move the selection display to one of the up, down, left, and right directions. When the process of step S4104 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4105>
In step S4105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S4105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4106, and if it determines that the enter button 21B has not been operated (step S4105: No), the End the music selection button effect setting screen processing.

<Step S4106>
In step S4106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 67) of "back one" on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the “back one step” selection image 974 has been selected (step S4106: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4107 and determines that the “back one step” selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4106: No), the process proceeds to step S4108.

<Step S4107>
If it is determined that the selection image 974 of "back one" has been selected (step S4106: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the setting item selection screen 95 (see FIG. 54 ( B) and FIG. 55) is executed (step S4107). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the setting item selection screen display flag to ON, and terminates the song list display setting screen process.

<Step S4108>
In step S4108, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 67) of "return to top menu" on the music selection button effect setting screen 99 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has been selected (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4109 and determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has not been selected. If so (step S4108: No), the process proceeds to step S4110.

<Step S4109>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of "return to top menu" has been selected (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53(B)). and FIG. 54(D)) is executed (step S4109). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4110>
In step S4110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B to select the "automatic" selection image 976 (see FIG. 67) on the music selection button effect setting screen 99. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "automatic". If the MPU 51 determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has been selected (step S4110: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4111, and if it determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has not been selected (step S4110: No), the process proceeds to step S4112.

<Step S4111>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Omakase" has been selected (step S4110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an effect regarding whether or not to execute an expectation level suggesting effect, a variable probability confirmation effect, and a reservation confirmation effect as music selection button effects. The settings are set to default (step S4111). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which all of the expectation level suggesting effect, probability variable confirmation effect, and reservation Renso confirmation effect are executed.

<Step S4112>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of "automatic" is not selected (step S4110: No), that is, if the operation of the decision button 21B by the player is any of "return one", "return to top menu" and "automatically". If it does not correspond to the operation for the item (4112), the MPU 51 temporarily selects the effect execution setting regarding whether or not to execute the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probability variable confirmation effect, and the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect. For example, when a determination operation is performed on the determination button 21B in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 67, the expectation degree suggesting effect is set to be executed, the probability variable confirmation effect is executed, and the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect is set to be non-executed. At this time, the MPU 51 causes the RAM 512 to store the setting contents and setting time of the music selection button effect. This makes it possible to display a music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) in the music selection button effect setting history screen process of FIG. 73, which will be described later.

In this way, in step S4112, the execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be set individually for the expectation level suggesting effect, the probability variable confirmation effect, and the reservation confirmation effect. can be made As a result, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the jackpot game in a way that suits him/herself.

Specifically, the player, by setting the expectation degree suggesting effect to be executed, for example, the decision operation on the decision button 21B for selecting a song is the expectation of the 5R probability variable jackpot game state or the 16R probability variable jackpot game state. It can be enjoyed as an act of confirmation. On the other hand, by setting the expectation level suggestion production to non-execution, even if the decision operation is performed, the expectation level suggestion production is not executed, so the expectation level suggested by the expectation level suggestion production 5R probability variable jackpot A big win game can be enjoyed while expecting to be in a game state or a 16R probability variable big win game state.

In addition, the player confirms whether the decision operation on the determination button 21B for selecting a song, for example, is in the 5R probability variable jackpot game state or the 16R probability variable jackpot game state by setting the variable probability confirmation effect to be executed. It can be enjoyed as an act for On the other hand, by setting the probability variable fixed performance to non-execution, the probability variable fixed performance is not executed even if the determination operation is performed, so that the 5R probability variable jackpot game state can be achieved without worrying about whether the probability variable fixed performance will be executed or not. Alternatively, the player can enjoy the jackpot game while expecting to be in the 16R probability variable jackpot game state.

In addition, by setting the pending Renso finalization effect to be executed, the player enjoys, for example, the decision operation on the determination button 21B for selecting a song as an action for confirming whether or not the Retaining Renso will occur. be able to. On the other hand, by setting the reservation consecutive villa confirmation performance to non-execution, even if the decision operation is performed, the reservation reservation confirmation performance is not executed, so there is no need to worry whether the reservation reservation confirmation performance will be executed or not. , the user can enjoy the reservation game while anticipating the occurrence of the reservation series.

<Step S4113>
In step S4113, the MPU 51 performs setting processing of the effect non-execution setting flag according to the player setting. Specifically, the music selection button effect flag is set to ON for the item set to "do not execute" which is different from the default setting. Here, the effect non-execution setting flag includes an expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag, a probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag, and a reserved Tokurenso fixed effect non-execution setting flag. For example, when the decision button 21B is operated in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 67, the non-execution setting flag of the pending consecutive villa confirmation effect is set to ON for the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect different from the default setting.

<Step S4114>
In step S4114, the MPU 51 executes top menu screen shift processing for shifting the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 (see FIG. 67) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). That is, when the setting for whether or not to execute the music selection button effect is completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to the top menu screen 93 . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the music list display setting screen process.

[Setting history selection process]
Here, FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the setting history selection process (step S3416 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). As shown in FIG. 56, in the setting history selection process, the selection decision unit 21 by the player is selected from items related to music selection during the jackpot game displayed on the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54(C) and 56). In accordance with the item selected by the operation of , processing is executed to shift the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to various setting screens 87 to 89 (see FIG. 56). In the setting history selection process below, similar to the setting item selection process described with reference to FIG. Although the case will be described as an example, the items related to music selection can be changed in the same manner as in the setting item selection process.

<Step S4201>
In step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to vary in the symbol display section 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4202, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4201: No). , the process proceeds to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
When the main symbol 921 starts to change (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the setting history selection screen display flag (step S4202), and terminates the setting history selection process.

<Step S4203>
In step S4203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(B)) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(C)), the MPU 51 It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the down selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4203: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4204. to step S4205.

<Step S4204>
In step S4204, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is either the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212, as in the temporary selection display change processing of step S3604 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. , a temporary selection display change process is executed to move the cursor image 946 and the temporary selection display one level up or down on the setting history selection screen 96 . When the process of step S4204 ends, the MPU 51 ends the setting history selection process.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S4205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4206, and if it determines that the enter button 21B has not been operated (step S4205: No), the End the setting history selection process.

<Step S4206>
In step S4206, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "melody pattern setting history" selection image 961 (see FIG. 56) on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is the "melody pattern setting history". When the MPU 51 determines that the "melody pattern setting history" selection image 961 has been selected (step S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4207, and the "melody pattern setting history" selection image 961 is not selected. If so (step S4206: No), the process proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4207>
If it is determined that the selection image 961 of "melody pattern setting history" has been selected (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIGS. 54(C) and 56) to the melody pattern setting screen. A melody pattern setting history screen shift process for shifting to the history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) is executed (step S4207). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF, sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to ON, and terminates the setting history selection process.

<Step S4208>
In step S4208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 962 (see FIG. 56) of "music list display setting history" on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "music list display setting history". When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 962 of the "music list display setting history" has been selected (step S4208: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4209, and the selection image 962 of the "music list display setting history" is selected. If it is determined not (step S4208: No), the process proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4209>
If it is determined that the selection image 962 of "music list display setting history" has been selected (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music list display setting history screen as shown in FIG. 88 is executed (step S4209). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF, sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to ON, and terminates the setting history selection process.

<Step S4210>
In step S4210, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 963 (see FIG. 56) of "music selection button effect setting history" on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is the "music selection button effect setting history". When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 963 of "music selection button effect setting history" has been selected (step S4210: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4211, and the selection image 963 of "music selection button effect setting history" is selected. If it is determined that there is not (step S4210: No), the process proceeds to step S4212.

<Step S4211>
If it is determined that the selection image 963 of "music selection button effect setting history" has been selected (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the music selection button effect setting history screen as shown in FIG. 89 (step S4211). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection history screen display flag to OFF, sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to ON, and terminates the setting history selection process.

<Step S4212>
In step S4212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "return one" selection image 964 (see FIG. 56) on the setting history selection screen 96 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the "back one" selection image 964 has been selected (step S4212: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4213 and determines that the "back one" selection image 964 has not been selected. If so (step S4212: No), the process proceeds to step S4214.

<Step S4213>
When it is determined that the selection image 964 of "back one" has been selected (step S4212: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the game setting screen 94 as shown in FIG. step S4213). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting history selection screen display flag to OFF, sets the game setting screen display flag to ON, and terminates the setting history selection process.

<Step S4214>
When the item selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B is other than "melody pattern setting history", "music list display setting history", "music selection button effect setting history", and "back one step", the MPU 51 Since it can be determined that "return to top menu" has been selected, as shown in FIG. 56, top menu screen shift processing is executed to shift the display screen from the setting history selection screen 96 to the top menu screen 93 (step S4214). At this time, the MPU 51 turns off the setting history selection screen display flag and turns on the top menu screen display flag.

[Melody pattern setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the melody pattern setting history screen processing (step S3418 of game setting processing in FIG. 52). In the melody pattern setting history screen process, a process of setting the temporary selection music output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game and the melody pattern (music output start) of the selected music based on the setting history is executed. Also, FIG. 70 shows an example of the melody pattern setting history screen 87 . In the following, the melody pattern setting history screen 87 will first be described with reference to FIG. 70, and then the melody pattern setting screen history processing will be described with reference to FIG.

The melody pattern setting history screen 87 shown in FIG. 70 is used to set melody patterns (output start portions) of temporarily selected songs in the jackpot game, and unselected songs and already selected songs as selected songs based on the setting history. This is the screen of The melody pattern setting history screen 87 includes a setting history display image 871 and a history selection image 872 that display melody pattern settings for provisionally selected music, unselected music, and already selected music for a plurality of times, as well as selection images 974 to 976 and a selection decision section. Contains image 977 .

The setting history display image 871 shows histories 1 to 3 regarding three melody pattern settings including the current melody pattern setting. Each of the melody pattern setting histories 1 to 3 includes information on setting times and information on past settings of melody patterns (output start portions) of temporarily selected songs, unselected songs, and already selected songs.

History selection images 872 include a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selection image is for setting the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music in the history 1 setting content. The history 2 selection image is for setting the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music in the setting contents of the history 2. FIG. The history 3 selection image is for setting the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music in the setting contents of the history 3. FIG. History 1 to 3 provisionally selected in history selection image 872 can be changed according to the operation of left selection button 213 or right selection button 214, and history 1 provisionally selected in history selection image 872 can be changed. History 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the setting history display image 871 change in conjunction with the change of 1 to 3. FIG.

<Step S4301>
Returning to the description of FIG. 69, in step S4301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to vary in the symbol display section 341 based on whether the value of the variation display counter is 0 or not. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4302, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4301: No). , the process proceeds to step S4303.

<Step S4302>
When the main symbol 921 starts to change (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the melody pattern setting history screen display flag (step S4302), and terminates the melody pattern setting history screen process.

<Step S4303>
In step S4303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 controls first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operation patterns. Based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player. to judge whether

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4304. to step S4305.

<Step S4304>
In step S4304, the MPU 51 temporarily selects the melody pattern setting history screen 87 according to which of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 the operated selection button 21A is. Temporary selection display change processing is executed to move the selection display to one of the up, down, left, and right directions. When the process of step S4304 ends, the MPU 51 ends the melody pattern setting history screen process.

<Step S4305>
In step S4305, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S4305: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4306, and if it determines that the enter button 21B has not been operated (step S4305: No), the End the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4306>
In step S4306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the decision button 21B to select the "return one" selection image 974 (see FIG. 70) on the melody pattern setting history screen. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the "back one step" selection image 974 has been selected (step S4306: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4307 and determines that the "back one step" selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4306: No), the process proceeds to step S4308.

<Step S4307>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 of "back one" has been selected (step S4306: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the setting history selection screen 96 (see FIG. 54 ( C) and FIG. 56) is executed (step S4307). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to OFF, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and terminates the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4308>
In step S4308, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 70) of "return to top menu" on the melody pattern setting history screen has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has been selected (step S4308: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4309 and determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has not been selected. If so (step S4308: No), the process proceeds to step S4310.

<Step S4309>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of "return to top menu" has been selected (step S4308: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53(B)). and FIG. 54(D)) is executed (step S4309). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

<Step S4310>
In step S4310, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "Random" selection image 976 (see FIG. 70) of the melody pattern setting history screen has been selected by the player's operation of the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "automatic". If the MPU 51 determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has been selected (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4311, and if it determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has not been selected (step S4310: No), the process proceeds to step S4312.

<Step S4311>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "automatically select" has been selected (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the melody patterns of the temporarily selected music, the unselected music, and the already selected music as default (step S4311). Here, the default setting of the melody pattern is melody pattern 1, which starts the output from the chorus part of the provisionally selected music, melody pattern 2, which starts the output from the chorus part of the unselected music, and singing pattern for the already selected music. This is the melody pattern 1 that starts output from the starting part (A melody part) (see FIG. 38).

<Step S4312>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of "automatic" is not selected (step S4310: No), the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is any of "back one", "return to top menu" and "automatic". If it does not correspond to the operation for the item, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern to the same setting as the setting history provisionally selected in the history selection image 872 (step S4312). For example, when the decision button 21B is operated in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 70, the melody pattern is set to the same setting as the history 2. That is, melody pattern 1 that starts output from the beginning of the song (A melody) for the temporarily selected music, melody pattern 2 that starts output from the chorus for the unselected music, and starts from the chorus for the selected music. is set to melody pattern 2, which is the output start of .

In this way, in step S4312, the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music and the setting of the melody pattern (output start portion) of the unselected music and the already selected music as the selected music are displayed on the melody pattern setting history screen. 87, the player can operate the selection determining unit 21, so that the same effect as setting the melody pattern according to the melody pattern setting screen 97 that is transferred from the setting item selection screen 95 can be enjoyed. In addition, the setting of the melody pattern (output start part) of the temporarily selected music piece and the selected music piece can be selected from the setting history, so that the melody pattern can be set to the same content as the past setting content by a simple operation on the selection determination unit 21. can be done. Therefore, the player can set a desired melody pattern according to the melody pattern setting history screen 87 with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 when, for example, the player wants to return to the previous setting.

<Step S4313>
At step S4313, the MPU 51 performs setting processing of a melody pattern setting flag according to the player setting. Specifically, a melody pattern setting flag is set to ON for an item for which a melody pattern different from the default setting is set. For example, when the determination operation is performed on the decision button 21B in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 70, the provisionally selected song melody pattern setting flag is set to ON for the provisionally selected song set to a melody pattern different from the default setting. be.

<Step S4314>
In step S4314, the MPU 51 executes top menu screen shift processing for shifting the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen 87 (see FIG. 70) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)). That is, when setting the melody patterns of the selected music image 831, the provisionally selected music image 832, and the unselected music image 833 (see FIG. 25), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the melody pattern setting history screen to the top menu screen. Move to 93. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the melody pattern setting history screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the melody pattern setting history screen processing.

[Music list display setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the music list display setting history screen process (step S3420 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the music list display setting history screen processing, the unselected music image 834 for the disliked music (unselected music) of the music selection image 83 in the jackpot game and the already selected music image 831 for the favorite music (already selected music) (see FIG. 25). A process of performing display settings regarding whether or not to display (display mode) based on the setting history is executed. Also, FIG. 72 shows an example of the music list display setting history screen 88 . In the following, the music list display setting history screen 88 will first be described with reference to FIG. 72, and then the music list display setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

The music list display setting history screen 88 shown in FIG. 72 is for setting whether or not to display the music selection image 83 (display mode) displayed on the music selection image display screen 82 in the jackpot game based on the setting history. is the screen. The song list display setting history screen 88 includes a setting history display image 881, a history selection image 882, and a selection image that display settings for whether to display disliked songs (non-selected songs) and favorite songs (already selected songs) multiple times. 974-976 and a selection decision part image 977 are included.

The setting history display image 881 shows histories 1 to 3 relating to settings for three times, including setting whether or not to display the currently unselected music and the already selected music. Each of the setting histories 1 to 3 includes information on setting times and information on whether or not to display non-selected songs and already selected songs.

History selection images 882 include a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selection image is for setting whether or not to display non-selected music and already selected music in the setting contents of history 1 . The history 2 selection image is for setting whether or not to display non-selected songs and already selected songs in the setting contents of history 2 . The history 3 selection image is for setting whether or not to display non-selected songs and already selected songs in the setting contents of history 3 . History 1 to 3 provisionally selected in history selection image 882 can be changed according to operation of left selection button 213 or right selection button 214. History 1 provisionally selected in history selection image 882 can be changed. History 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the setting history display image 881 changes in conjunction with the change of 1 to 3. FIG.

<Step S4401>
Returning to the description of FIG. 71, at step S4401, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to vary in the symbol display section 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4402, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4401: No). , the process proceeds to step S4403.

<Step S4402>
When the main symbol 921 starts to change (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the music list display setting screen display flag (step S4402), and ends the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4403>
At step S4403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 controls first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operation patterns. Based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player. to judge whether

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4404. to step S4405.

<Step S4404>
In step S4404, the MPU 51 selects the temporary selection button 211, the bottom selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 as the operated selection button 21A on the music list display setting history screen. Temporary selection display change processing is executed to move the selection display to one of the up, down, left, and right directions. When the process of step S4404 ends, the MPU 51 ends the song list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4405>
In step S4405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S4405: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4406, and if it determines that the enter button 21B has not been operated (step S4405: No), the End the music list display setting history screen processing.

<Step S4406>
In step S4406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 72) of "back one" on the music list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the "back one step" selection image 974 has been selected (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4407 and determines that the "back one step" selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4406: No), the process proceeds to step S4408.

<Step S4407>
If it is determined that the selection image 974 of "back one" has been selected (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54). (C) and FIG. 56) is executed (step S4407). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to OFF, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and terminates the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4408>
In step S4408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "return to top menu" selection image 975 (see FIG. 72) of the song list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the player's operation of the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has been selected (step S4408: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4409 and determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has not been selected. If so (step S4408: No), the process proceeds to step S4410.

<Step S4409>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of "return to top menu" has been selected (step S4408: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIG. 53B). ) and FIG. 54(D)) is executed (step S4409). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the music list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4410>
In step S4410, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the "Random" selection image 976 (see FIG. 72) of the music list display setting history screen 88 has been selected by the player's operation of the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "automatic". If the MPU 51 determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has been selected (step S4410: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4411, and if it determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has not been selected (step S4410: No), the process proceeds to step S4412.

<Step S4411>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 976 of "Random" has been selected (step S4410: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the non-selected music image 834 for the disliked selected music (non-selected music) on the music selection image display screen 82 (see FIG. 25). And the display setting of the already selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) for the favorite selected music (already selected music) is set to default (step S4411). Here, the default display setting is a setting in which both the unselected music image 834 and the already selected music image 831 are displayed (see FIG. 25).

<Step S4412>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of "automatic" is not selected (step S4410: No), that is, if the operation of the decision button 21B by the player is any of "return one", "return to top menu", and "automatically". , the MPU 51 sets the display settings of the non-selected music image 834 and the already-selected music image 831 (see FIG. 25) in the settings of the setting history provisionally selected in the history selection image 882 ( step S4412). For example, when the decision button 21B is operated in the temporary selection state shown in FIG. 72, the same setting as history 1 is made. Specifically, both the non-selected music image 834 corresponding to the disliked music (non-selected music) and the selected music image 831 corresponding to the favorite music (non-selected music) are set to be displayed.

In this way, in step S4412, the display settings for displaying or not displaying the selected music (favorite music) image 831 and the non-selected music (disliked music) image 834 included in the music selection image 83 are displayed on the music list display setting history screen 88. Based on this, the player can operate the selection determination unit 21, so that the same effect as the case of performing the display setting according to the music list display setting screen 98 transferred from the setting item selection screen 95 can be obtained. In addition, since the display settings of the selected song (favorite song) image 831 and the non-selected song (dislike song) image 834 can be selected from the setting history, it is possible to display the same content as the past setting contents with a simple operation on the selection determination unit 21. Display can be set. Therefore, the player can perform desired display settings according to the music list display setting history screen 88 with a small number of operations on the selection determining section 21 when, for example, the player wants to return to the previous settings.

<Step S4413>
In step S4413, the MPU 51 performs setting processing of a music image non-display setting flag according to the player setting. Specifically, the music image non-display setting flag is set to ON for items set to "non-display" which is different from the default setting. For example, when the decision operation is performed on the decision button 21B in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 72, the settings are the same as the default settings. is set to on.

<Step S4414>
In step S4414, the MPU 51 executes top menu screen shift processing for shifting the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 (see FIG. 72) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53(B) and 54(D)). . That is, when the display settings for the non-selected music image 834 and the selected music image 831 are completed, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music list display setting history screen 88 to the top menu screen 93 . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list display setting history screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the music list display setting history screen process.

[Music selection button effect setting history screen processing]
Here, FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect setting history screen process (step S3422 of the game setting process in FIG. 52). In the music selection button effect setting history screen process, a process for performing the effect execution setting related to the music selection button effect executed when selecting a song in the jackpot game based on the setting history is executed. Also, FIG. 74 shows an example of a music selection button effect setting history screen 89 . In the following, the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 will be described first with reference to FIG. 74, and then the music selection button effect setting history screen processing will be described with reference to FIG.

The music selection button effect setting history screen 89 shown in FIG. 74 is a screen for performing settings related to effects to be executed when music is selected in the jackpot game based on the setting history. A music selection button effect setting history screen 89 is a setting history display image that displays settings for whether or not to execute music selection button effects including expectation level suggesting effects, probability variation confirmation effects, and reservation confirmation effects for a plurality of times individually for each effect. 891 , including a history selection image 892 , selection images 974 to 976 and a selection determining portion image 977 .

The setting history display image 891 shows histories 1 to 3 regarding settings for three times, including settings regarding whether or not to execute the current music selection button effect. Each of the setting histories 1 to 3 includes information on setting time and information on setting whether or not to execute each music selection button effect.

History selection images 892 include a history 1 selection image, a history 2 selection image, and a history 3 selection image. The history 1 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect to the setting contents of the music selection button effect of the history 1 . The history 2 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect to the setting contents of the music selection button effect of the history 2 . The history 3 selection image is for setting the music selection button effect to the setting contents of the music selection button effect of the history 3 . History 1 to 3 provisionally selected in history selection image 892 can be changed according to operation of left selection button 213 or right selection button 214. History 1 provisionally selected in history selection image 892 can be changed. History 1 to 3 temporarily selected in the setting history display image 891 change in conjunction with the change of 1 to 3. FIG.

<Step S4501>
Returning to the description of FIG. 73, in step S4501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 921 has started to vary in the symbol display section 341 based on whether the value of the variation display counter is 0 or not. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has started (step S4501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4502, and when it determines that the variation of the main symbol 921 has not started (step S4501: No). , the process proceeds to step S4503.

<Step S4502>
When the main symbol 921 starts to change (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to OFF (step S4502), and terminates the music selection button effect setting history screen process.

<Step S4503>
At step S4503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 controls first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operation patterns. Based on the pattern flags (see FIGS. 18B to 18E), whether or not any of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player. to judge whether

If the MPU 51 determines that the selection button 21A has been operated (step S4503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4504. to step S4505.

<Step S4504>
In step S4504, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214, on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. A temporary selection display change process is executed to move the temporary selection display to one of the up, down, left, and right directions. When the process of step S4504 ends, the MPU 51 ends the music selection button effect setting history screen process.

<Step S4505>
In step S4505, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B based on the first to third enter operation pattern flags (see FIG. 18(F)). If the MPU 51 determines that the enter button 21B has been operated (step S4505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4506, and if it determines that the enter button 21B has not been operated (step S4505: No), the End the music selection button effect setting history screen processing.

<Step S4506>
In step S4506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 974 (see FIG. 74) of "back one" on the music selection button effect setting history screen has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return by one". When the MPU 51 determines that the "back one step" selection image 974 has been selected (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4507 and determines that the "back one step" selection image 974 has not been selected. If so (step S4506: No), the process proceeds to step S4508.

<Step S4507>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 974 of "back one" has been selected (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the setting history selection screen 96 (FIG. 54). (C) and FIG. 56)) (step S4507). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to OFF, sets the setting history selection screen display flag to ON, and terminates the song list display setting history screen process.

<Step S4508>
In step S4508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 975 (see FIG. 74) of "return to top menu" on the music selection button effect setting history screen has been selected by the player's operation of the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "return to top menu". When the MPU 51 determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has been selected (step S4508: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4509 and determines that the "return to top menu" selection image 975 has not been selected. If so (step S4508: No), the process proceeds to step S4510.

<Step S4509>
If it is determined that the selection image 975 of "return to top menu" has been selected (step S4508: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (FIG. 53 (B). ) and FIG. 54(D)) is executed (step S4509). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music selection button effect setting history screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the music selection button effect setting screen process.

<Step S4510>
In step S4510, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B to select the "automatic" selection image 976 (see FIG. 74) on the music selection button effect setting history screen. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "automatic". If the MPU 51 determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has been selected (step S4510: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4511, and if it determines that the "automatic" selection image 976 has not been selected (step S4510: No), the process proceeds to step S4512.

<Step S4511>
When it is determined that the selection image 976 of "Omakase" has been selected (step S4510: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an effect regarding whether or not to execute an expectation level suggesting effect, a variable probability confirmation effect, and a reservation confirmation effect as music selection button effects. The settings are set to default (step S4511). Here, the default setting of the music selection button effect is a setting in which all of the expectation level suggesting effect, probability variable confirmation effect, and reservation Renso confirmation effect are executed.

<Step S4512>
If it is determined that the selection image 976 of "automatic" is not selected (step S4110: No), that is, if the operation of the decision button 21B by the player is any of "return one", "return to top menu" and "automatically". , the MPU 51 sets the game settings related to the presence or absence of the execution of the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probability variable confirmation effect, and the reserved consecutive house confirmation effect to the provisionally selected settings (step S4512). For example, when the decision button 21B is operated in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. 74, the same setting as history 3 is made. Specifically, all of the expectation degree suggesting effect, the probability variable confirmation effect, and the reservation Renso confirmation effect are set to be non-executable.

As described above, in step S4512, the effect execution setting for execution or non-execution of the music selection button effect can be performed by the player by operating the selection determination unit 21 based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89. It is possible to enjoy the same effect as when the effect execution setting is performed according to the music selection button effect setting screen 99 to be shifted. In addition, since the effect execution setting of the music selection button effect can be selected from the setting history, the same effect execution setting as the past setting can be set by a simple operation on the selection determination unit 21. - 特許庁Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform the desired effect execution setting based on the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 with a small number of operations on the selection decision unit 21.例文帳に追加

<Step S4513>
In step S4513, the MPU 51 performs setting processing of the effect non-execution setting flag according to the player setting. Specifically, the effect non-execution setting flag is set to ON for the item set to "do not execute" which is different from the default setting. For example, when a decision operation is performed on the decision button 21B in the provisional selection state shown in FIG. All of the expectation degree suggesting effect non-execution setting flag, the probability variable fixed effect non-execution setting flag, and the reserved Tokurenso fixed effect non-execution setting flag are set to ON.

<Step S4514>
In step S4514, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the music selection button effect setting history screen 89 (see FIG. 74) to the top menu screen 93 (see FIGS. 53B and 54D). That is, when the effect execution setting for the music selection button effect is completed, the display screen is shifted to the top menu screen 93 . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the music list selection button effect setting screen display flag to OFF, sets the top menu screen display flag to ON, and terminates the music list display setting screen process.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the player operates the selection determination unit 21 to display the temporarily selected music image 832 that enables selection of music included in the already selected music. By performing a decision operation on the selection deciding section 21 in this state, the previously selected tune can be selected. Therefore, the player can select the previously selected tune with a small number of operations on the selection determining section 21 and output the selected tune from the speaker 26 . Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can increase the degree of attention to the special game and the interest in the special game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

In addition, the player can display the unselected music image 833 as the provisionally selected music image 832 by operating the selection determination unit 21, and by performing the determination operation on the selection determination unit 21 in this state, the previously selected music image 833 can be displayed. Unselected music that has never been played can be output from the speaker 26. - 特許庁Therefore, the player can select an unselected song with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21 and output the unselected song from the speaker 26 . As a result, the player can not only distinguish between the already-selected music and the unselected music, but also select either of the already-selected music or the unselected music with a small number of operations on the selection determination unit 21. Desired music can be easily selected and output from the speaker 26. - 特許庁

Furthermore, when the music selection image 83 is displayed, the temporarily selected music displayed first as the temporarily selected music image 832 is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the speaker 26 . Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already-selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected songs in the process up to that point, and the player can appreciate the goodness of the unselected songs. You can secure an opportunity to convey

[Other embodiments]
Another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Further, in other embodiments described below, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as various processing procedures will be omitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the default settings, the output of the temporarily selected music starts at the chorus of both the selected music and the unselected music, and the output of the selected music starts at the A melody (singing part) of the already selected music. ), and the chorus of the unselected music. That is, in the first embodiment, a case has been described in which, when a provisionally selected piece of music is selected as a selected piece of music, the output of the selected piece of music starts again from the A melody part (singing part) or the chorus part.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the default setting, when the selected music (temporarily selected music) is the already selected music, the selected music is selected from the continuation of the temporarily selected music that was output from the speaker 26 at the time the music was selected. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is output from the speaker 26, that is, in that when the already selected music is selected, the temporarily selected music is continuously output from the speaker 26. FIG.

By the way, in conventional gaming machines, it is common that a temporarily selected song is output from the chorus in order to effectively convey the goodness of the song, and a selected song is output from the chorus in order to increase the attention to the jackpot game. is. In this case, when music is selected, the temporarily selected music output at the stage of temporary selection is interrupted once, and the chorus of the same music as the temporarily selected music is restarted at the stage of music selection. Therefore, the player listens to the chorus of the same song repeatedly in a short period of time.

However, if the selected song is a previously selected song that the player likes, this already selected song is a previously selected song. It can also result in a tendency to get tired of the. In addition, there is a concern that the player's tension, which has been raised by listening to the chorus of the favorite song, may suddenly drop if the temporarily selected song is cut off. Furthermore, since the output start of the selected music is the chorus part, in the jackpot game that executes the round game (opening and closing execution mode) about 5 times, the music start part of the selected music that is the selected music (for example, the intro part, A You may not be able to listen to the melody part (singing part).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the already selected music is output as the temporarily selected music from the A melody part (singing part), and the selected music is selected. If the music is already selected music, the temporarily selected music is continuously output. That is, when selecting an already-selected song, the song is output from the beginning of the song during the provisional selection stage. Therefore, at least at the stage of provisional selection, the start part of the already-selected music can be listened to without fail, and the chorus part of the same music is redundantly output in a short time from the stage of provisional selection to the stage of selection of music. Therefore, even when the already selected music is selected repeatedly, it is possible to prevent the user from quickly becoming bored with the already selected music. In addition, by continuously outputting the selected music from the provisional selection stage, the player can increase the tension from the beginning of the music to the chorus and maintain the high tension. Interest in the jackpot game is improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a melody pattern table used in this embodiment, and FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of temporarily selected music output processing executed in this embodiment. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output process executed in this embodiment. That is, the present embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the temporarily selected music is continuously output from the speaker 26 when the already-selected music is selected. 75, the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 76, and the selected music output process shown in FIG. In the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 76 and the selected music output process shown in FIG. 77, the melody pattern settings of the temporarily selected music and the selected music are set differently from the default settings by the player to simplify the explanation. It is not taken into account if For example, in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 76, the step corresponding to step S2703 in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 40 in the first embodiment is omitted. 77, steps corresponding to steps S2806, S2809, and S2810 in the temporarily selected music output process shown in FIG. 41 in the first embodiment are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, the default setting of the melody pattern for the tentatively selected songs including the initially tentatively selected song is that, when the already selected songs are provisionally selected, all songs A to T are melody pattern 1, that is, A The output is set to start from the melody (singing part), and when an unselected song is tentatively selected, all songs A to T are set to melody pattern 2, that is, to start output from the chorus. On the other hand, in the selected music, the default setting of the melody pattern is that when the already selected music is selected, all of the music A to T are the continuation of the temporarily selected music, that is, the output of the temporarily selected music is continued. When the selected song is selected, all of songs A to T are set to melody pattern 1, that is, output starts from A melody (singing part). Here, the continuation of the output of the provisionally selected music means that the provisionally selected music is output without interruption. This includes the case where the selected music is cut off. Note that in embodiments other than the present embodiment, continuation of provisionally selected music output is also interpreted synonymously with the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the present embodiment, the default setting of the provisionally selected music is different from that in the first embodiment described above. If so (step S2702: No), melody pattern 1, which is the default setting, is unconditionally selected (step S4601), and the temporarily selected music is output as the temporarily selected music from the A melody part (singing part). (step S2707).

As shown in FIG. 77, in this embodiment, the default setting of the selected music is different from that in the first embodiment. (Step S2801: No), the continuation of the output of the provisionally selected music, which is the default setting, is unconditionally selected (step S4701), and the provisional selection output from the speaker 26 at the time when the already selected music is selected as the selected music. The music is continuously output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the music (step S2811).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the player selects an already-selected song, the player can listen to the already-selected song output from the beginning of the song as the temporarily selected song, continuing from the part output at the time of the decision operation. can. That is, when selecting an already-selected song, the player can continuously listen to the already-selected song from the beginning of the song after the already-selected song is provisionally selected.

In the present embodiment, the selected music is output from the speaker 26 from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continuing the temporarily selected music) on the condition that the selected music (temporary selected music) is the already selected music. When the selected music (temporarily selected music) is an unselected music, it is conceivable to output the selected music from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continue the temporarily selected music) from the speaker 26 . In the present embodiment, output of the provisionally selected music starts at the A melody part (singing part) of the already selected music, and the chorus part of the unselected music. The start may be the chorus part, or the output start may be the A melody part (singing part) when the temporarily selected music is an unselected music. Further, in the present embodiment, the output start of the selected music is the A melody part (singing part) of the unselected music, but even if the output start of the unselected music is the chorus part of the temporarily selected music, good. In addition, in the present embodiment, it was not taken into consideration that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player in the temporarily selected music output process and the selected music output process. Similarly, the temporarily selected music output process and the selected music output process may be executed in consideration of the fact that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which melody patterns are determined for provisionally selected music and selected music depending on whether these music are already selected or unselected. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which melody patterns are determined according to the jackpot type (exactly, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the temporarily selected music and the selected music.

In this embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (exactly the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the provisionally selected music and the selected music. Processing is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of the melody pattern table used in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 78, the default setting of the melody pattern of the initially temporarily selected music is that in the 5R jackpot game (5R normal jackpot game and 5R variable jackpot game), all of the songs A to T are melody pattern 2, that is, from the chorus part. , and in the 16R (variable probability) jackpot game, all songs A to T are set to start output from the melody pattern 1, that is, the A melody part (singing part) in the 16R jackpot game. On the other hand, the default setting of the melody pattern of the selected music is set such that in the 5R jackpot game, all of the music A to T are continuations of the provisionally selected music, that is, the output of the provisionally selected music continues, and in the 16R jackpot game, the music A to music. All of T are set to melody pattern 1, that is, the start of output from the A melody portion (singing portion). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of a 5R jackpot (5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot), the provisionally selected music is output from the chorus portion, and the provisionally selected music is continuously output when the music is selected. On the other hand, in the case of the 16R jackpot, the tentatively selected song is output from the A melody portion (singing portion), and the selected song is output from the A melody portion (singing portion).

By the way, in general gaming machines, a plurality of jackpot games with different advantages for the player are provided as jackpot games. In this embodiment, the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R variable probability jackpot, and the 16R variable probability jackpot, which have different advantages as described above, are provided. On the other hand, as described above, in conventional gaming machines, the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus in order to effectively convey the goodness of the music, and the selected music is output from the chorus in order to increase the attention to the jackpot game. It is common to

However, if the output start of both the temporarily selected music and the selected music is set to the chorus part, the temporarily selected music output at the stage of temporary selection is interrupted once, and the chorus part of the same music as this temporarily selected music is reproduced. It will start again when you select a song. Therefore, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable or disgusted by listening to the chorus of the same song repeatedly in a short period of time or by interrupting the song. In spite of such concerns, output of temporarily selected music is stopped and the same music is again output as selected music from the chorus part until the jackpot game with the number of rounds of about 16R and a relatively long game time. I can't find the meaning of it.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of a 5R jackpot game with a relatively short playing time, when a song is selected, the tentatively selected song is continuously output. In this way, even in a 5R jackpot game in which the game time is relatively short, it is possible to continuously listen to the temporarily selected music for the singing start of the music as the temporarily selected music, so that it is output at the stage of temporary selection. The provisionally selected music is not interrupted once, and it is possible to avoid listening to the chorus of the same music in a short period of time. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not feel uncomfortable or disgusted by repeatedly listening to the chorus of the same piece of music in a short period of time or by interrupting the piece of music.

On the other hand, in the case of a 16R jackpot with a relatively long playing time, the tentatively selected song is output from the chorus portion, and the selected song is output from the A melody portion (singing portion). Therefore, in the 16R jackpot, the player can avoid listening to the chorus of the same song twice in a short period of time. Also, after enjoying the chorus part as a temporarily selected song, you can listen to the singing part of the song as a newly selected song. As a result, in the 16R jackpot game with a relatively long playing time, the player can thoroughly enjoy the song from the beginning of the selected song. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or disgusted by the interruption of the music.

Here, FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the temporarily selected music output process executed in this embodiment, and FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the selected music output process executed in this embodiment. be. In the provisional selection music output process shown in FIG. 79 and the selection music output process shown in FIG. 80, the melody pattern settings of the provisional selection music and the selection music are set differently from the default settings by the player for the sake of simplification of explanation. It is not taken into account if

As shown in FIG. 79, in this embodiment, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (exactly, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) for the temporarily selected music (see FIG. 78). In the selected music output process, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not it is a 16R jackpot. Also, the melody pattern of the temporarily selected music is determined according to the determination result in step S4801 (steps S4802 and S4804), and the temporarily selected music is output according to the determined melody pattern (steps S4803 and S4805).

Specifically, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a 16R jackpot (step S4801). If it is not a 16R jackpot (step S4801: No), that is, if it is a 5R jackpot, the melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4802), and the temporarily selected music is the A melody part (singing part). is output from (step S4803). On the other hand, if it is a 16R jackpot (step S4801: Yes), the melody pattern 2 is selected according to the default setting of the 16R jackpot, and the tentatively selected song is output from the chorus (step S4904).

If a predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702), a melody pattern is randomly selected (step S4806), and a temporarily selected song is output with a melody pattern according to the selected melody pattern (step S4806). S4807, S4803 and S4805).

Here, in order for the melody pattern to be randomly selected, it is a condition that the promotion flag is set to ON (step S2701: Yes), but the promotion effect flag is not set to ON in the case of the 16R jackpot. . Therefore, since it can be determined that it is a 5R jackpot when the promotion effect flag is set to ON, by randomly selecting a melody pattern in step S4806, a predetermined condition (Yes in steps S2701 and S2702) 5R that satisfies Concerning the jackpot, a contradiction may occur in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the temporarily selected music.

Then, if the melody pattern 2 is not selected in step S4806 (step S4807: No), that is, if the melody pattern 1 is selected, the temporarily selected song is A according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot. The melody part (singing part) is output (step S4803). On the other hand, when the melody pattern 2 is selected in step S4806 (step S4807: Yes), the tentatively selected music is output from the chorus portion different from the default setting of the 5R jackpot. As a result, a contradiction is generated in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the provisionally selected music piece, and the fact that the promotion effect is to be executed is clarified in advance before the promotion effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 80, in this embodiment, for the selected music, the melody pattern is determined according to the jackpot type (exactly, the number of rounds of the jackpot game) (see FIG. 78). In the output process, it is determined in step S4901 whether or not it is a 5R jackpot. Specifically, if the selected song is an already selected song (step S2801: No), if the song is determined for the second time or later (step S2802: No), or if the promotion effect flag is set to off ( Step S2803: No), it is determined whether or not it is a 5R jackpot (step S4901). Then, if the 5R jackpot is won (step S4901: Yes), the provisionally selected song is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902). On the other hand, if it is not a 5R jackpot (step S4901: No), that is, if it is a 16R jackpot, the melody pattern 1 is selected according to the default setting of the 16R jackpot, and the selected song is output from the A melody part (singing part) ( step S4903).

If the condition for receiving the inconsistent output lottery is satisfied (Yes in all steps S2801 to S2803), the inconsistent output lottery is performed (step S2804), and if the inconsistent output lottery is not won (step S2805: No), the temporarily selected music piece is continuously output (step S4902). That is, in order to receive the contradictory output lottery, it is a condition that the promotion effect flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), but as described above, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON Since it can be determined that it is a 5R jackpot, if the contradictory output lottery is not won (step S2805: No), the temporarily selected music is continuously output according to the default setting of the 5R jackpot (step S4902).

On the other hand, when the contradictory output lottery is won (step S2805: Yes), the selected music is output with the melody pattern 1 different from the default setting of the 5R jackpot. As a result, a contradiction is generated in the melody pattern (output start portion) of the selected music, and the fact that the promotion effect is to be executed is clarified in advance before the promotion effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the default setting of the selected music in the case of the 5R jackpot is to continue outputting the temporarily selected music. This avoids outputting a part of the song or outputting a song from a different part after the song is selected. As a result, in the case of a 5R jackpot, the music can be continuously listened to without a break except when the contradictory output lottery is won, so that the music can be enjoyed without stress even if the playing time is short. On the other hand, in the 16R jackpot game state where the game time is long, the player listens to the chorus of the temporarily selected music, and then listens again to the selected music, which is the same as the temporarily selected music, from the A melody part (singing part). be able to. Therefore, in the 16R jackpot game state, it is possible to fully enjoy the selected music from the A melody part (singing part) including the chorus part of the music because there is enough time to play.

In addition, it can be determined whether or not a promotion effect indicating that the game state is more advantageous for the player is to be executed, depending on whether or not there is a contradiction in the start of output of the music at the time of provisional selection or selection. Therefore, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the temporarily selected music piece and the output start portion of the selected music piece. As a result, the operation of the selection button 21A of the selection decision unit 21 for temporarily selecting a song and the operation of the decision button 21B of the selection decision unit 21 for selecting a song are not merely an act of temporarily selecting or selecting a song. , the player can enjoy the act of confirming whether or not the game state is more advantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, the selected music is output from the continuation of the temporarily selected music (continuing the temporarily selected music) on the condition that it is a 5R jackpot. It is also conceivable to output the selected music from the continuation (continuing the provisionally selected music). Of course, in both the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot, the selected tune may be output from the continuation of the selected tune (continuing the tentatively selected tune). Further, in the present embodiment, the output of the provisionally selected music is started at the chorus part of the 5R jackpot and at the 16R jackpot (singing part). ), or the start of outputting the provisionally selected song for the 16R jackpot may be the chorus. In addition, in the present embodiment, it was not taken into consideration that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player in the temporarily selected music output process and the selected music output process. Similarly, the temporarily selected music output process and the selected music output process may be executed in consideration of the fact that the melody pattern is set differently from the default setting by the player.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, as the song selection button effect processing, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON, a song selection button effect is performed on the condition that an unselected song is selected in the first song determination. A case where the (expectation degree suggesting effect, probability variation confirmation effect, and reservation Renso confirmation effect) is executed has been described (see FIG. 42).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the conditions of the first embodiment described above, the song selection button effect processing is performed on the condition that the determination button 21B is repeatedly hit or long-pressed in response to the music selection operation. A case where a button effect is executed will be described.

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, whether or not the player has performed the determination operation for selecting a song on the determination button 21B (see FIG. 1) is determined by the second determination operation pattern flag (FIG. 18(F)). ) is turned on (see step S2606 in the music selection process in FIG. 39). That is, in the above-described first embodiment, it is determined that the player has operated the decision button 21B to decide the music by confirming that the decision button 21B (see FIG. 1) has been operated. . In this way, when it is determined that the decision button 21B has been operated by the player by starting the operation of the decision button 21B (see FIG. 1), is the music selection button effect executed at the moment when the decision button 21B is operated? can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the moment when the decision button 21B is operated to determine whether or not the music selection button effect is to be executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the determination button 21B is repeatedly hit or long-pressed. Therefore, unlike the above-described first embodiment, for a certain period of time after the start of the operation of the enter button 21B, while increasing the expectation that the music selection button effect will be executed, the repeat operation of the enter button 21B and the You can enjoy long press operation. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to enjoy the operation of the enter button 21B in a manner different from that of the above-described first embodiment regarding whether or not the music selection button effect is executed.

In addition, the pattern display section 341 may suggest or indicate to the player that the music selection button effect is executed by repeatedly pressing or long-pressing the decision button 21B. 25 (for example, by setting the display mode as shown in FIG. 25), the continuous hitting operation or long-pressing operation on the decision button 21B can be enjoyed as a so-called secret command for executing the song selection button effect.

Here, FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing executed in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, in the music selection button effect processing of the present embodiment, a determination operation is performed between steps S2902 and S2903 (see FIG. 42) of the music selection button effect processing of the first embodiment. After that, it is determined whether or not a continuous hitting operation or a long pressing operation is performed within a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second to 20 seconds) (step S5101). It is determined based on the determination button operation data (see FIG. 18F) whether or not the continuous pressing operation or the long pressing operation is performed when the determination operation is performed. For example, in step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 39, if it is determined that the operation of the decision button 21B has started by confirming that the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S2606: Yes), the fixed Whether the decision button 21B has been hit repeatedly can be determined by whether the ON/OFF of the second decision operation pattern flag is confirmed a plurality of times (for example, 5 to 30 times) within the time. Further, whether or not the long-pressing operation has been performed depends on whether or not the duration for which the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON has reached a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 15 seconds) within the predetermined time. can be judged.

Then, if the continuous hit operation or long press operation is performed within a certain period after the decision operation (step S5101: Yes), if the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2903: Yes), 5R probability variation song selection button Effect determination processing is executed (step S2904), and when the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is on (step S2905: Yes), 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing is executed (step S2906) .

In the present embodiment, when selecting an unselected song, the player repeatedly hits or long-presses the enter button 21B, whereby the music selection button effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the act of selecting a song as an act of confirming whether the music selection button effect is executed by performing a repeated hitting operation or a long pressing operation. As a result, the player can be made to actively select music.

In the present embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the decision button 21B is repeatedly hit or long-pressed in response to the music decision operation. The music selection button effect may be executed when any one of the conditions in the form (that the operation of the decision button 21B is started) is satisfied. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing when an operation of the enter button 21B is started, or when it is confirmed that a long press operation or repeated hitting operation has been performed.

In addition, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not one of the continuous pressing operation and the long pressing operation has been performed. may be

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not an unselected music piece is selected, but step S2901 may be omitted and the music selection button effect may be executed even when an already selected music piece is selected. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the already selected music is selected.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, when the promotion effect flag is set to ON as the music selection button effect processing, an unselected music is selected by operating the decision button 21B (see FIG. 1) in the first music selection. A case has been described where the music selection button effects (expectation level suggesting effect, probability variation confirmation effect, and reservation Renso confirmation effect) are executed on the condition that they are performed (see FIG. 42). Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, in addition to the conditions of the above-described first embodiment, as the music selection button effect processing, a continuous hitting operation or a long-pressing operation on the decision button 21B (see FIG. 1) triggered by the music decision operation is performed. The case where the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that is performed has been described (see FIG. 81). In the above-described first and fourth embodiments, it is possible to enjoy whether or not the music selection button effect is executed by operating the determination button 21B for selecting music.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as the song selection button effect processing, in the first song determination, on the condition that an unselected song is selected by operating the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) different from the enter button 21B, A case where the music selection button effect is executed will be described. In this embodiment, it is assumed that both the operation on the enter button 21B and the operation on the operation button 20 are valid as the enter operation for song selection. Specifically, in step S2606 in the music selection process of FIG. 39, the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data shown in FIG. 18A and the second determination of the enter button operation data shown in FIG. When it is confirmed that any one of the operation pattern flags is set to ON, it is determined that the determination operation for music selection has been performed.

In the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, music can be selected by operating the enter button 21B, as in the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. In addition, music can also be selected by operating the operation button 20, unlike the above-described first and fourth embodiments. Then, the music selection button effect is executed on condition that the operation button 20 is operated instead of the enter button 21B. That is, since the music selection button effect is executed by an operation different from that in the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment, whether or not the music selection button effect is executed depends on the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. It can be enjoyed in a way different from that of the fourth embodiment.

In addition, the design display unit 341 may suggest or indicate to the player that the music selection button effect is executed by operating the operation button 20, but if such suggestion or indication is not performed (for example, 25), it is possible to enjoy the music selection operation by the operation button 20 as a secret command for executing the music selection button effect.

Here, FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the music selection button effect processing executed in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, in the music selection button effect processing of this embodiment, the operation button 20 is operated between steps S2902 and S2903 (see FIG. 42) of the music selection button effect processing of the first embodiment. (step S5201). Whether or not a song has been selected by operating the operation button 20 is determined, for example, by whether or not the second operation pattern flag of the operation button operation data is set to ON. Then, in step S5201, if it is determined that a song has been selected by operating the operation button 20 (step S5201: Yes), if the first promotion effect flag is on (step S2903: Yes), 5R probability variation song selection button effect Determination processing is executed (step S2904), and when the second promotion effect flag or the third promotion effect flag is ON (step S2905: Yes), 16R probability variation music selection button effect determination processing is executed (step S2906).

In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the player instructs to operate the decision button 21B to perform the decision operation. By performing an operation, a music selection button effect can be executed. Therefore, interest in the act of selecting music is improved.

In this embodiment, the music selection button effect is executed on the condition that the music is decided by the decision operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). (that the operation of the enter button 21B is started), the music selection button effect may be executed. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at either timing when the decision button 21B is started to be operated or when the operation button 20 is started to be operated.

Further, if either one of the conditions of the present embodiment (decision operation on the operation button 20) and the condition of the fourth embodiment (continuous hitting operation or long pressing operation on the decision button 21B) is satisfied, A music selection button effect may be executed. That is, the music selection button effect may be executed at any timing of the timing when the operation of the operation button 20 is started and the timing when it is confirmed that the long-pressing operation or the repeated hitting operation is performed. Of course, the music selection button effect can be executed at any timing when any of the conditions in this embodiment, the conditions in the first embodiment, and the conditions in the fourth embodiment are satisfied. may

In addition, instead of determining a song by performing a decision operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), a music selection button effect is produced when the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) is pressed for a long time or hit repeatedly. may be executed.

In addition, in the music selection button effect processing of this embodiment, it is determined in step S2901 whether or not an unselected song is selected. may be executed. Of course, the music selection button effect may be executed only when the already selected music is selected.

[Summary of Invention]
An outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added below. In order to facilitate understanding of the corresponding relationship between each supplementary note and each embodiment, reference numerals may be attached for convenience of explanation, but the invention related to the supplementary note is limited to the specific configuration to which the reference numerals are attached. is not. Moreover, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
production means (26, 341, etc.) including image display means (341) for executing production with images and audio output means (26) for executing production for outputting music;
A music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the sound output means (26) from a plurality of music, and based on the music selection image (83). production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26);
operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a song to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the song selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
with
The effect executing means (51)
As the music selection image (83), a temporary selection music that can be selected by the player's decision operation on the operation means (21) for selecting music to be output by the audio output means (26). An image including a selected music image (832) and an already selected music image (831) indicating that the selected music has already been selected by the player as music to be output by the audio output means (26). is displayed on the image display means (341),
changing the temporarily selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in accordance with the player's operation on the operation means (21);
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the temporarily selected music is output to the audio output means (26), and the temporarily selected music is selected when the decision operation is performed. A gaming machine characterized by outputting the music that has been played as the selected music from the audio output means (26).

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A1, the already-selected song image indicating that the already-selected song has already been selected by the player is displayed on the image display means as a song selection image for allowing the player to select a song. Is displayed. Therefore, when the player selects an already-selected song that has been selected before, the player can very easily find an image for selecting the already-selected song from among the song selection images. By operating the operation means while confirming the position of the already-selected music image in the music selection image, the player can temporarily select the already-selected music and display it as the temporarily selected music image. Further, by performing a decision operation on the operating means while the previously selected music piece is displayed as a provisionally selected music image, the already selected music piece can be output from the audio output means. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the already-selected music that was previously selected with a small number of operations on the operation means, and output the already-selected music from the sound output means.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and increasing interest in the special game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

[Appendix A2]
The effect executing means (51) displays a prescribed number (eg, "10") of song selection images (83) smaller than the number of the plurality of songs (eg, "20") by the image display means. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, characterized in that it is displayed at (341).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A2, even if the image display means prepares so many songs that it cannot be displayed at once, and the song selection image for some of the plurality of songs is displayed. Even if there is, the already-selected music image for selecting the already-selected music is displayed, so that the already-selected music can be easily selected with a simple operation.

[Appendix A3]
The effect executing means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the temporarily selected music image (832) and the already selected music image (831) in a distinguishable manner. The gaming machine described in A2.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the already-selected music image (831) in a display mode different from that of the provisionally-selected music image (832).

[Appendix A5]
The effect executing means (51) displays an additional image indicating the already selected music on at least a part of the periphery of the already selected music image (831), so that the already selected music image (832) is displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix A3 or appendix A4, characterized in that the image display means (341) is displayed so as to be identifiable from the temporarily selected music image (832).

[Appendix A6]
The effect executing means (51) displays the already-selected music image (831) in a predetermined area of the image display means (341), thereby displaying the already-selected music image (832) as the temporarily selected music. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3 to A5, characterized in that the image display means (341) displays the image (832) so as to be distinguishable from the image (832).

According to the gaming machine according to appendices A3 to A6, since the already-selected music image is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the provisionally-selected music image, it is easier to find the already-selected music image among the music selection images. Therefore, the convenience of temporarily selecting and selecting the already-selected music is further improved.

[Appendix A7]
Supplementary note A1 characterized in that said effect execution means (51) causes said image display means (341) to display a predetermined upper limit number of said already selected music images (831) selected from a number of 2 or more. to Supplementary Note A6.

[Appendix A8]
Further comprising storage means (512) for storing already selected music information related to the already selected music,
The effect execution means (51) displays the upper limit number of already selected music images (831) on the image display means (341) based on the already selected music information stored in the storage means (512). The gaming machine according to appendix A7, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine according to appendices A7 and A8, the image display means displays the already-selected music images equal to or less than the upper limit number selected from a number of 2 or more. That is, since a plurality of already-selected music images can be displayed, the convenience of provisional selection and selection of a plurality of already-selected music pieces that have been selected in the past is improved. On the other hand, setting an upper limit on the number of already-selected music images prevents an excessive number of already-selected music images from being displayed. Therefore, the player can select previously selected songs based on an appropriate number of already selected song images, and thus the operation burden when selecting already selected songs is reduced.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to appendix A8, wherein the storage means (512) stores only the last selected song as the already selected song when multiple songs are selected in the special game state. .

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A9, when songs are selected a plurality of times in the special game state, only the last selected song is the already-selected song. Therefore, even if music is selected a plurality of times during execution of one special game state, the final selected music is clarified and the already selected music image is occupied by the already selected music for one special game state. You can prevent it from being done. In addition, for example, when the user reselects another song because he/she does not like the song that has been selected once, it is possible to prevent the disliked song from being displayed as the already selected song image, and at the same time, the reselected song can be displayed as the already selected song. This improves the convenience when making selections based on music images.

[Appendix A10]
The effect execution means (51) displays the upper limit number of already selected music images (831) in the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341) in the order of newest selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A7 to A9, characterized in that it is arranged and displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image (832).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A10, in the music selection image that is displayed first, the already selected music image corresponding to the already selected music with the newest selection date and time is displayed at a position close to the provisionally selected music image. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find out the most recently selected already-selected music and can reselect the most recently selected music by the number of operations on the operating means. As a result, the player can enjoy the game while concentrating on the special game because the operation burden when reselecting the most recently selected song is reduced.

[Appendix A11]
The effect execution means (51) displays the upper limit number of already selected music images (831) in the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341) in order of the selection frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A7 to A9, wherein the game machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the temporarily selected music image.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A11, the already selected music image corresponding to the already selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection rate within a predetermined number of times) is displayed at a position close to the provisionally selected music image. That is, the already-selected music image is displayed as reflecting the player's recent music selection tendency. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find out the recently selected already selected music and can select the recently selected music again with a small number of operations on the operation means. As a result, the player can enjoy the game while concentrating on the special game because the operation burden when selecting the recently selected song again is reduced.

[Appendix A12]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display all of the upper limit number of already-selected music images (831) as those for different music. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the gaming machine according to Appendix A12, since the already-selected music images do not include a plurality of images for the same music, even if an upper limit is set for the number of displayed already-selected music images, the music corresponding to the upper limit is displayed. Already-selected music images for the number of already-selected music are displayed. Therefore, when the player repeatedly selects the same song and wants to select an already-selected song other than that song, the player can easily find out the already-selected song that he/she wants to select. As a result, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the previously selected music again, and can enjoy the game while concentrating on the special game accordingly.

[Appendix A13]
If the number of already-selected music images (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit, the shortage of the display number (for example, "1" to "3") with respect to the upper limit ), wherein the unselected music image (833) is displayed as the music selection image (83) according to the above.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A13, even if the number of already-selected music images to be displayed on the image display means is less than the upper limit, the unselected music images are displayed in place of the already-selected music images. Thus, the specified number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix A14]
The effect executing means (51)
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating an unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music is further displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A13, characterized in that it is displayed.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A14, the player can distinguish and recognize the selected music image that has been selected before and the unselected music image that has not been selected before. By operating the operation means while confirming, it is possible to provisionally select an unselected musical piece and display it as a provisionally selected musical piece image. Therefore, even when the player selects an unselected piece of music rather than an already selected piece of music, the player can select the unselected piece of music with a small number of operations on the operating means and output the unselected piece of music from the audio output means.

[Appendix A15]
When displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) converts the temporarily selected music image (832) to the already selected music image (831) and the unselected music image (831). The gaming machine according to appendix A14, characterized in that it is displayed between the selected music image (833).

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A15, both the already selected image and the unselected image are adjacent to the temporarily selected music image at least at the stage where the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means. Therefore, by changing the provisionally selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means, the player can select any of the selected music that has been selected before and the unselected music that has not been selected before. Even in the case of selecting music, the target music can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output means.

[Appendix A16]
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) selects the plurality of initial provisionally selected music pieces for the initial provisionally selected music image (832) to be displayed first. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A14 or supplementary note A15, wherein the non-selected musical piece is selected from among the musical pieces.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A16, the initial provisionally selected music is selected from the unselected music, and the initial provisionally selected music, which is the unselected music, is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already-selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected songs in the process up to that point, and the player can appreciate the goodness of the unselected songs. You can secure an opportunity to convey

[Appendix A17]
Depending on whether the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is the already selected music piece or the unselected piece of music, the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is reproduced from different parts of the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece by the voice. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A14 to A16, characterized in that the output means (26) outputs.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A17, by performing a decision operation on the operation means in a state in which the unselected music is displayed as the temporarily selected music image, an unselected music that has not been selected before can be changed to an already selected music. It is possible to cause the audio output means to output a portion of the music that is different from the selected portion. As a result, the player can listen to the selected music from different parts depending on whether the already selected music is selected or the unselected music. It is possible to have a different way of enjoying the music from outputting the music.

[Appendix A18]
The effect execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output from the music start portion of the already-selected music when the temporarily-selected music is the already-selected music, A game machine according to appendix A17, characterized in that, in the case of a selected song, the sound output means (26) is caused to output the unselected song from the chorus.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A18, the player can listen to the song from the start part when the provisionally selected song is the already selected song, while listening to the chorus when the provisionally selected song is the unselected song. You can listen to parts. Therefore, the player can enjoy the temporarily selected music from the beginning of the previously selected music. On the other hand, the player can listen to songs that have not been selected before, starting from the most exciting chorus part of the song. easier.

[Appendix A19]
The effect execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the already-selected music from the beginning of the music when the selected music is the already-selected music, and the selected music is the unselected music. The gaming machine according to appendix A17 or appendix A18, wherein the sound output means (26) is caused to output the unselected music piece from the chorus portion when .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A19, the player can listen to the music from the start part when the selected music is the already selected music, and from the chorus part when the selected music is the unselected music. can listen. Therefore, regarding the selected music, the player can enjoy the previously selected music from the start part. On the other hand, since the player can listen to songs that have not been selected before, starting with the chorus that has the highest excitement in the song, it is easy for the player to judge whether the currently selected song is to his liking. Become.

[Appendix A20]
The operation means (21) is operated by the player when performing settings related to the effect in the special game state,
further comprising display setting means (51) for performing display settings as to whether or not to display the already-selected music image (831) according to a setting operation by the player on the operation means (21),
The effect executing means (51)
A display setting screen that enables setting whether or not to display the already selected music image (831) on the display screen of the image display means (341) according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. transition to (88,98),
When the display screen is the display setting screen (88, 98), the display setting means (51) performs the setting operation by the player by operating the operation means (21), The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A19, wherein the display setting is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A20, since it is possible to set whether or not to display the already-selected music image included in the music selection image, the music selection image is displayed on the image display means in a display mode that suits the taste of the player. be able to. As a result, the player can select a song to be output from the audio output means based on the song selection image in the display mode set by the player. Also, the player can select whether or not to display the already-selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, when the music selection image includes the selected music image for the selected music selected in the past by the previous player, the player displays the music selection image that does not include the already selected music image. be able to.

[Appendix A21]
further comprising display setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information relating to the setting history of the display settings;
The effect executing means (51) stores the display setting memory means (512) as the display setting screens (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. ) to the display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in the
When the display screen is the display setting history screen (88), the display setting means (51) performs a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the setting history image (881) by the player. The gaming machine according to appendix A20, characterized in that the display setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A21, when the display screen of the image display means is the display setting history screen, the player can set the same display settings as the past settings by performing setting operations on the operation means. can be done. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous settings, the player can perform desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to appendix A21, wherein the effect executing means (51) causes the display setting history screen (88) to display the setting history image (881) including an image indicating a set time.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A22, by referring to the set time, the player can distinguish between, for example, the setting history of a player who has played before and his/her own setting history. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it becomes easier to predict the selection of the desired setting history. Therefore, the player can perform desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A23]
An output for setting output start from which of a plurality of predetermined output start portions according to a player's setting operation on the operation means (21) to start outputting the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece. Further comprising start setting means (51),
The effect execution means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting in accordance with the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. , 97),
The output start setting means (51) sets the output start portion by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A22, wherein when the operation is performed, the output start setting for the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A23, since the output start portion of the temporarily selected music or the selected music can be set, the temporarily selected music or the selected music can be output from the audio output means from the portion that matches the player's preference. can.

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A24, the player can start the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the beginning of the music or the chorus. Therefore, the player can start outputting the tentatively selected music or the selected music from the part that matches his or her taste. Here, the start part of the music or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. Therefore, the player can select a portion to start outputting the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the start portion and the chorus portion of the music, so that the player can determine whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the previously selected music. It becomes easy to determine whether the music is one that has not been listened to or has not been listened to before.

[Appendix A25]
further comprising output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information relating to the setting history of the output start setting;
The effect execution means (51) stores the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screens (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. (512) to shift to the output start setting history screen (87) displaying the setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
The output start setting means (51) is operated by the player to set the output start based on the setting history image (871) when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87). In this case, the gaming machine according to appendix A23 or appendix A24, characterized in that the output start setting is performed according to the content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A25, when the display screen of the image display means is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation means, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform the desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to appendix A25, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix A26, by referring to the set time, the player can distinguish between, for example, the setting history of a player who has played before and his/her own setting history. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it becomes easier to predict the selection of the desired setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B1]
main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
production means (26, 341, etc.) including image display means (341) for executing production with images and audio output means (26) for executing production for outputting music;
music selection information storage means (512) for storing music selection information relating to music selection by the player;
A music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the sound output means (26) from a plurality of music, and based on the music selection image (83). production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26);
operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a song to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the song selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
with
The effect executing means (51)
The song selection image (83) indicates that the song is a temporarily selected song that can be selected by the player's decision operation on the operation means (21) for selecting at least a song to be output by the sound output means (26). causing the image display means (341) to display the temporarily selected music image (832) in an identifiable manner;
changing the temporarily selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in accordance with the player's operation on the operation means (21);
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the temporarily selected music is output to the audio output means (26), and the temporarily selected music is selected when the decision operation is performed. outputting the selected music from the audio output means (26) as a selected music,
The music selection information storage means stores, as the music selection information, provisionally selected music information related to the provisionally selected music, and previously selected music that has already been selected by the player as music to be output by the audio output means (26). and unselected music information related to unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music,
The unselected music information is the initial provisionally selected music image among the initial provisionally selected music images corresponding to the initial provisionally selected music image first displayed on the image display means (341) as the provisionally selected music image (832). A gaming machine characterized by comprising non-selected music information relating to non-selected music that was not selected by the player at the stage displayed on the image display means (341) as.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B1, non-selected music information relating to non-selected music is stored in the music selection information storage means. Therefore, based on the non-selected music information, the player can be made to recognize the information regarding the non-selected music via the effect means such as the image display means. As a result, the player can recognize which of the plurality of songs is the non-selected song. The player is freed from the trouble of tentatively selecting or selecting a non-selected musical piece against his or her will.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and increasing interest in the special game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

[Appendix B2]
Further comprising information updating means (51) for updating the music selection information stored in the music selection information storage means (512),
The information updating means (51) is characterized in that, when the selected music piece is the non-selected music piece, updating is performed by clearing information about the music piece corresponding to the selected music piece from the non-selected music piece information. The gaming machine described in B1.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B2, when the non-selected music is selected, the non-selected music is treated as other music, so the music selected by the player is displayed as the non-selected music image on the image display means. It is avoided to continue to be done. This prevents the player from unintentionally avoiding the selection of the song by mistakenly thinking that the previously selected song is the non-selected song.

[Appendix B3]
The information updating means (51) is characterized in that, when the selected music is the non-selected music, updating the already selected music information to include information on the music corresponding to the selected music. The gaming machine described in B2.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B3, in addition to being able to prevent the previously selected song from being misunderstood as a non-selected song, the song is treated as an already selected song, so the already selected song corresponding to the song The image will be displayed on the image display means. As a result, unintentional avoidance of selection of the song can be more reliably prevented.

[Appendix B4]
The effect executing means (51)
As the music selection image (83), at least the temporarily selected music image (832), the selected music image (831) indicating the already selected music, and the unselected music indicating the unselected music. displaying the image (833) on the image display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B3, wherein the unselected music image (833) includes an identifiable unselected music image (834) indicating the unselected music.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix B4, since an image including an unselected music image is displayed as an unselected music image, the player did not select it even though it was first displayed as a provisionally selected music image in the past. Since the non-selected music can be distinguished from other music, the player can more reliably avoid temporarily selecting the non-selected music against his or her will. In addition, by displaying the non-selected music image, you can avoid the non-selected music and search for new favorite music, so even if the time for selecting music is limited to a relatively short time, You can use it effectively to find new songs you like.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix B4, since the selected music image and the unselected music are displayed as the music selection image, the player can distinguish and recognize the already selected music and the unselected music. Regardless of whether a song or an unselected song is selected, the target song can be easily and efficiently selected with a small number of operations on the operating means and output from the audio output means.

[Appendix B5]
The effect executing means (51) stores a predetermined upper limit number of previous non-selected music images (831) selected from two or more numbers based on the non-selected music information stored in the music selection information storage means ) on the image display means (341).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B5, by setting an upper limit on the number of non-selected music images, an excessive number of non-selected music images are prevented from being displayed, and unnecessarily selecting non-selected music. Risk can be further reduced.

[Appendix B6]
The effect executing means (51) arranges and displays the non-selected music images (834) corresponding to the upper limit number of non-selected music, in the order of newest non-selected date and time, at a position farther from the provisionally selected music image (832). The gaming machine according to appendix B5, characterized by:

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B6, since the non-selected music image for the new non-selected music on the non-selected date and time is displayed at a position far from the provisionally selected music image, the non-selected music that was not selected most recently is selected. reduce the risk of being lost.

[Appendix B7]
The effect executing means (51)
causing the image display means (341) to display a predetermined number (eg, "10") of song selection images (83) smaller than the number of the plurality of songs (eg, "20");
In the initial music selection image (83) first displayed on the image display means (341), the non-selected music image (834) is not displayed on the image display means (341), and the player operates the operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B4 to B6, wherein the non-selected music image (834) is displayed on the image display means (341) in response to the above.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B7, the non-selected music image is not displayed in the initial music selection image first displayed on the image display means. On the other hand, non-selected songs are less likely to be selected by the player. Therefore, by not displaying non-selected music images in the initial music selection image, more unselected music (excluding non-selected music) that is more likely to be selected by the player than non-selected music is displayed in the initial music selection image. Many can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required to select songs from the unselected songs excluding the unselected songs, and reduce the stress given to the player in song selection. On the other hand, since the player can display non-selected music images by operating the operating means, it is also possible to select music from the non-selected music.

[Appendix B8]
Further comprising an initial music arrangement determination means (51) for determining an initial arrangement of the plurality of music in order to display the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341),
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the music selection image (83) according to the initial arrangement determined by the initial music arrangement determination means (51),
The initial music sequence determining means (51) places the non-selected music at the position where the minimum number of times of operation for the operation means (21) necessary for making the non-selected music the temporary selected music is the largest in the initial arrangement. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B4 to B7, characterized by arranging music.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B8, the minimum number of operations for the operation means necessary to make non-selected songs that are unlikely to be selected by the player (highly likely to be avoided by the player) to be temporarily selected songs are arranged at the position where the number of Therefore, as in the gaming machine according to appendix B7, it is possible to display more unselected songs (excluding unselected songs) that are more likely to be selected by the player than unselected songs in the initial song selection image. can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required to select songs from the unselected songs excluding the unselected songs, and reduce the stress given to the player in song selection.

[Appendix B9]
The operation means (21) is operated by the player when performing settings related to the effect in the special game state,
further comprising display setting means (51) for performing display settings as to whether or not to display the unselected music image (834) according to a setting operation by the player on the operation means (21),
The effect executing means (51)
A display setting screen that enables setting whether or not to display the unselected music image (831) on the display screen of the image display means (341) according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. transition to (88,98),
When the display screen is the display setting screen (88, 98), the display setting means (51) performs the setting operation by the player by operating the operation means (21), The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B4 to B8, wherein the display setting is performed according to the setting content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B9, the player can select whether or not to display the non-selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, when the music selection image includes a non-selected music image for a non-selected music that the previous player did not select in the past, the player can select a music selection image that does not include the non-selected music image. can be displayed.

[Appendix B10]
further comprising display setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information relating to the setting history of the display settings;
The effect executing means (51) stores the display setting memory means (512) as the display setting screens (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. ) to the display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the setting history information stored in the
The display setting means (51), when the display screen is the display setting history screen (88) and the player performs a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the setting history image (881), The gaming machine according to appendix B9, characterized in that the display setting is performed based on the content set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B10, when the display screen of the image display means is the display setting history screen, the player can set the same display settings as the past settings by performing setting operations on the operation means. can be done. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous settings, the player can perform desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B11]
The game machine according to appendix B10, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the setting history image (881) including an image indicating a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B11, by referring to the set time, the player can distinguish, for example, the setting history of a player who has played before and his/her own setting history. When there is a setting history to be selected in the setting history, it becomes easier to predict the selection of the desired setting history. Therefore, the player can perform desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix B12]
When the music selection image (83) is first displayed on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) is configured to display the initial temporary selection music image (832) first as the temporary selection music image (832). 832) is selected from the unselected music pieces, and the initial temporary selection music piece is output from the audio output means (26). .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B12, when the music selection image is displayed, the initial provisionally selected music to be first displayed as the provisionally selected music image is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output means. be. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already-selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected song as the initial tentatively selected song in the process up to that point. It is possible to secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected songs.

[Appendix B13]
The game machine according to appendix B12, wherein the effect executing means (51) selects the initial tentatively selected music from music other than the non-selected music among the unselected music.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix B13, when the music selection image is displayed, the initial provisionally selected music is selected from the unselected music other than the non-selected music. As a result, the player can see that the non-selected music that was previously selected as the temporarily selected music by the effect execution means but was not selected by the player is again selected by the effect execution means and displayed as the initial provisionally selected music image. free from the annoyance of

[Appendix C1]
main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
production means (26, 341, etc.) including image display means (341) for executing production with images and audio output means (26) for executing production for outputting music;
A music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the sound output means (26) from a plurality of music, and based on the music selection image (83). production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26);
operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a song to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the song selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
with
The effect executing means (51)
The song selection image (83) indicates that the song is a temporarily selected song that can be selected by the player's decision operation on the operation means (21) for selecting at least a song to be output by the sound output means (26). displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
changing the temporarily selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in accordance with the player's operation on the operation means (21);
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the temporarily selected music is output to the audio output means (26), and the temporarily selected music is selected when the decision operation is performed. outputting the selected music from the audio output means (26) as a selected music,
The provisionally selected music or the selected music is a previously selected music that has already been selected by the player or is an unselected music other than the already selected music, and the temporarily selected music or the selected music A game machine characterized by outputting said temporarily selected music or said selected music from different parts of said audio output means (26).

[Appendix C2]
The effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the beginning of the music when the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the already selected music. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, characterized by:

[Appendix C3]
The effect executing means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the chorus when the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the unselected music. A gaming machine according to appendix C1 or appendix C2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine according to notes C1 to C3, the selected song is output from different parts of the song depending on whether the previously selected song is provisionally selected or selected and the unselected song is provisionally selected or selected. Therefore, the player can enjoy the temporarily selected music or the selected music from different parts depending on whether the already selected music is temporarily selected or selected and when the temporarily selected or unselected music is selected. For example, if the temporarily selected music or selected music is already selected music, the selected music can be heard from the beginning of the music, and if the temporarily selected music or selected music is unselected music, the unselected music can be listened to. You can listen to parts. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the selected music from the start of the music, the chorus of which has been listened to before. On the other hand, for songs that have not been selected before, the user can listen to the climax of the song, which makes it easier for the user to determine whether the song is to her liking.

[Appendix C4]
The effect executing means (51), when displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), displays an initial provisional selection music image (832) first displayed as the provisional selection music image (832). ) is selected from the unselected songs among the plurality of songs.

[Appendix C5]
The game machine according to appendix C4, wherein the effect executing means (51) outputs the initially tentatively selected music from the chorus to the audio output means (26).

According to the gaming machines according to appendices C4 and C5, when the music selection image is displayed, the temporarily selected music to be first displayed as the temporarily selected music image is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is, for example, the chorus part. is output by the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already-selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected songs in the process up to that point. In particular, when the initially provisionally selected music is output from the chorus part, the most exciting chorus part of the unselected music can be heard without fail, and an opportunity to convey the goodness of the unselected music to the player can be ensured.

[Appendix C6]
An output for setting output start from which of a plurality of predetermined output start portions according to a player's setting operation on the operation means (21) to start outputting the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece. Further comprising start setting means (51),
The effect execution means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting in accordance with the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. , 97),
The output start setting means (51) sets the output start portion by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C5, wherein when the operation is performed, the output start setting for the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C6, since the output start portion of the temporarily selected music or the selected music can be set, the temporarily selected music or the selected music can be output from the audio output means from the portion that matches the taste of the player. can.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine according to appendix C6, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C7, the player can cause the output of the temporarily selected music or the selected music to start from the music start portion or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the tentatively selected music or the selected music from the part that matches his or her taste. Here, the start part of the music or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. Therefore, the player can select a portion to start outputting the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the start portion and the chorus portion of the music, so that the player can determine whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the previously selected music. It becomes easy to determine whether the music is one that has not been listened to or has not been listened to before.

[Appendix C8]
further comprising output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information relating to the output start setting history for the output start setting;
The effect execution means (51) stores the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screens (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. (512) to shift to the output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512);
When the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) is operated by the player to perform the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871). The gaming machine according to appendix C6 or appendix C7, wherein the output start setting is performed according to the content set by the player when the output start setting is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C8, when the display screen of the image display means is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation means, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform the desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix C9]
The game machine according to appendix C8, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix C9, by referring to the set time, the player can, for example, distinguish between the output start setting history of a player who has played before and his/her own output start setting history. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in the output start setting history of oneself, it becomes easier to predict the case of selecting the desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix D1]
main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
production means (26, 341, etc.) including image display means (341) for executing production with images and audio output means (26) for executing production for outputting music;
A music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the sound output means (26) from a plurality of music, and based on the music selection image (83). production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26);
operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a song to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the song selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
with
The effect executing means (51)
The song selection image (83) indicates that the song is a temporarily selected song that can be selected by the player's decision operation on the operation means (21) for selecting at least a song to be output by the sound output means (26). displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
changing the temporarily selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in accordance with the player's operation on the operation means (21);
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the temporarily selected music is output to the audio output means (26), and the temporarily selected music is selected when the decision operation is performed. outputting the selected music from the audio output means (26) as a selected music,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the provisionally selected music piece output from the audio output means (26) at the timing when the decision operation is performed is continued to be output.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the provisionally selected music piece is continuously output when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a predetermined condition is met, the selected music is continuously output from the stage of provisional selection without interruption, so that the same part of the music is duplicated and output in a short period of time from the stage of provisional selection to the stage of selection of music. is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly listening to the chorus of the same song in a short period of time and from feeling discomfort and disgust at the interruption of the song.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and increasing interest in the special game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the selected music is the already selected music.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D2, when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the already selected music is continuously output from the stage of the temporary selection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the chorus portion of the same music from being duplicated and output in a short period of time from the stage of provisional selection to the stage of music selection. It can be suppressed.

[Appendix D3]
When the provisionally selected music is the already-selected music, the effect execution means (51) outputs a music start part (for example, a singing part (A melody part)) of the already-selected music to the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein output is made from an intro part (prelude part).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D3, when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the already selected music is output from the music start portion, and when the selected music is the already selected music, the temporarily selected music continues. output as That is, when selecting an already-selected song, the song is output from the beginning of the song during the provisional selection stage. Therefore, not only is it possible to prevent the chorus part of the same song from being output in duplicate in a short time from the stage of selection to the stage of song selection, but at least at the stage of provisional selection, the song start part of the already-selected song can be reproduced. you can definitely hear it. In addition, since the already-selected music is continuously output from the provisional selection stage, the player can increase the tension from the beginning of the music to the chorus and maintain the high tension.

[Appendix D4]
The special game state includes a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R probability variable jackpot game state), and a second special game state (16R probability variable jackpot game state) whose playing time is longer than the first special game state. including
The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming state is the first special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D4, in the first special game state in which the game time is short, the player performs the decision operation on the provisionally selected music output from the audio output means at the timing when the decision operation is performed. You can continue listening from the part that was output when it was cut. That is, in the first special game state, during a short game time, the same part of the music is output both when the music is provisionally selected and after the music is selected, or the music is output again from different parts after the music is selected. is avoided. As a result, the music can be continuously listened to within a short playing time, so that the music can be enjoyed without stress even if the playing time is short.

[Appendix D5]
The game machine according to appendix D4, wherein the effect execution means (51) causes the sound output means (26) to output the provisionally selected music from the chorus in the first special game state.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D5, in the first special game state, the player can listen to the climax part of the tentatively-selected music piece with the highest excitement. You can secure an opportunity to convey the goodness of the selected music. On the other hand, since the player can listen to the lively chorus of the tentatively selected music, it becomes easier for the player to determine whether the tentatively selected music is his or her favorite music or whether it is a previously selected favorite music. Further, when the game state is the first special game state, by outputting the provisionally selected music from the chorus part, the player can surely listen to the chorus part after the provisional selection and after selecting the music, and the chorus part is output. You can listen to the song continuously from the part without stress.

[Appendix D6]
The effect execution means (51) outputs the selected music to the audio output means (26) when the decision operation is performed in the second special game state. ), an intro part (prelude part)), the gaming machine according to appendix D4 or appendix D5

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D6, when the game state is the second special game state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, in the second special game state in which the game time is long, the player can listen again to the music that was output from the audio output means when the decision operation was performed, from the beginning of the music. That is, in the second special game state, since there is enough playing time, it is possible to fully enjoy the music, including the chorus of the music, from the beginning of the music.

[Appendix D7]
Any of appendices D4 to D6, characterized in that the effect execution means (51) causes the sound output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music from a music start part in the second special game state. The game machine described.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D7, when the game state is the second special game state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, in the second special game state in which the game time is long, the player can listen again to the music that was output from the audio output means when the decision operation was performed, from the beginning of the music. That is, in the second special game state, since there is enough playing time, it is possible to fully enjoy the music, including the chorus of the music, from the beginning of the music. On the other hand, when the game state is the first special game state, the temporarily selected music is output from the music start portion as described above. Therefore, the player can determine whether the game state is the first special game state or the second special game state depending on whether the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus portion or the music start portion. be. Also, the game time differs between the first special game state and the second special game state, and in general, the longer the game time, the higher the expected game value tends to be. Therefore, the player can enjoy focusing on the output start portion of the temporarily selected music in order to determine whether or not the second special game state is more generally advantageous to the player.

[Appendix D8]
The effect executing means (51) displays the music selection image (83) as an already-selected music that has been selected by the player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D7, characterized in that the image display means (341) further displays a music image (831) in an identifiable manner.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D8, the player operates the operation means while confirming the position of the already-selected music image in the music selection image, thereby temporarily selecting the already-selected music and displaying it as the temporarily-selected music image. can be made Further, by performing a decision operation on the operating means while the previously selected music piece is displayed as a provisionally selected music image, the already selected music piece can be output from the audio output means. Therefore, the player can efficiently select the already-selected music that was previously selected with a small number of operations on the operation means, and output the already-selected music from the sound output means.

[Appendix D9]
The effect executing means (51)
As the music selection image (83), an unselected music image (833) indicating an unselected music other than the selected music among the plurality of music is further displayed on the image display means (341) so as to be identifiable. display,
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the plurality of initial provisionally selected music pieces for the initial provisionally selected music image (832) to be displayed first as the provisionally selected music image (832) is displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix D8, wherein selection is made from the unselected music among the music.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D9, when displaying the music selection image, the temporarily selected music to be first displayed as the temporarily selected music image is selected from the unselected music, and the unselected music is output from the audio output means. . Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already-selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected songs in the process up to that point, and the player can appreciate the goodness of the unselected songs. You can secure an opportunity to convey

[Appendix D10]
The operation means (21) is operated by the player when performing settings related to the effect in the special game state,
Output start setting means ( 51) further comprising
The effect execution means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting in accordance with the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. , 97),
The output start setting means (51) sets the output start portion by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D9, wherein when the operation is performed, the output start setting is performed according to the setting contents set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D10, the player can set the output start of the temporarily selected music or the selected music. Therefore, by setting the output start portion, the player can output the tentatively selected music piece or the selected music piece from his/her favorite portion.

[Appendix D11]
further comprising output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing output start setting history information relating to the output start setting history for the output start setting;
The effect execution means (51) stores the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screens (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. (512) to shift to the output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871B) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512);
The output start setting means (51) performs an operation of performing the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871B) by the player when the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87). The gaming machine according to appendix D10, characterized in that the output start setting of the content set by the player is performed when is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D11, when the display screen of the image display means is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation means, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous output start setting, the player can perform the desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operating means.

[Appendix D12]
The game machine according to appendix D11, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871B) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix D12, by referring to the set time, the player can, for example, distinguish between the output start setting history of a player who has played before and the output start setting history of the player himself/herself. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in the output start setting history of oneself, it becomes easier to predict the case of selecting the desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E1]
main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
production means (26, 341, etc.) including image display means (341) for executing production with images and audio output means (26) for executing production for outputting music;
A music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the sound output means (26) from a plurality of music, and based on the music selection image (83). production execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26);
operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a song to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the song selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
with
The effect executing means (51)
The song selection image (83) indicates that the song is a temporarily selected song that can be selected by the player's decision operation on the operation means (21) for selecting at least a song to be output by the sound output means (26). displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
changing the temporarily selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in accordance with the player's operation on the operation means (21);
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the temporarily selected music is output to the audio output means (26), and the temporarily selected music is selected when the decision operation is performed. outputting the selected music from the audio output means (26) as a selected music,
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the temporarily selected music has already been selected by the player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). if it is an unselected piece of music other than the selected piece of music, causing the audio output means (26) to output the unselected piece of music from the chorus;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the selected music is the unselected music, the sound output means (26) outputs the unselected music from the beginning of the music.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the temporarily selected music is output from the chorus portion, and the selected music is output from the music start portion. Therefore, when an unselected piece of music that has not been selected before is selected, the player can listen to the beginning and chorus of the unselected piece of music, so that the player can fully understand the goodness of the unselected piece of music. can tell On the other hand, the player does not listen to the chorus part that has already been output at the stage of provisional selection in a short time, and even if the time required for the special game is short, the player can listen to the unselected music that is the selected music. After selecting a song, you can listen to it from the beginning of the song, and you can check again whether the unselected song suits your taste.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix E1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and increasing interest in the special game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

[Appendix E2]
The effect executing means (51) displays a prescribed number (eg, "10") of song selection images (83) smaller than the number of the plurality of songs (eg, "20") by the image display means. The gaming machine according to appendix E1, characterized in that it is displayed at (341).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E2, even if the image display means is prepared with a large number of songs that cannot be displayed at once, and a song selection image for some of the plurality of songs is displayed. Even if there is, the already-selected music image for selecting the already-selected music is displayed, so that the already-selected music can be easily selected with a simple operation.

[Appendix E3]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display the temporarily selected music image (832) and the already selected music image (831) indicating the temporarily selected music so as to be identifiable. The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or appendix E2, characterized by:

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to appendix E3, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the already-selected music image (831) in a display mode different from that of the provisionally-selected music image (832).

[Appendix E5]
As described in appendix E3 or appendix E4, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays an additional image indicating the already-selected music at least partly around the already-selected music image (831). game machine.

[Appendix E6]
The effect executing means (51) according to any one of appendices E3 to E5, characterized in that the already-selected music image (831) is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display means (341). game machine.

According to the gaming machines according to appendices E3 to E6, since the already-selected music image is displayed in a manner distinguishable from the provisionally-selected music image, it is easier to find the already-selected music image among the music selection images. Therefore, the convenience of temporarily selecting and selecting the already-selected music is further improved.

[Appendix E7]
Supplementary note E3 characterized in that said effect execution means (51) causes said image display means (341) to display a predetermined upper limit number of said already selected music images (831) selected from a number of 2 or more. to Appendix E6.

[Appendix E8]
Further comprising storage means (512) for storing already selected music information related to the already selected music,
The effect execution means (51) displays the upper limit number of already selected music images (831) on the image display means (341) based on the already selected music information stored in the storage means (512). A gaming machine according to Appendix E7, characterized in that it allows

According to the gaming machine according to appendices E7 and E8, in the special game state, the image display means displays the music selection image including the upper limit number or less of already-selected music images selected from two or more. That is, a plurality of already-selected music images can be displayed. Further, by setting an upper limit on the number of already-selected music images, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of already-selected music images from being displayed. Therefore, the player can select previously selected songs based on an appropriate number of already selected song images, and thus the operation burden when selecting already selected songs is reduced.

[Appendix E9]
The gaming machine according to appendix E8, wherein the storage means (512) sets only the last selected song as the already selected song when multiple songs are selected in the special game state.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E9, when songs are selected a plurality of times in the special game state, only the last selected song is the already selected song. Therefore, even if music is selected a plurality of times during execution of one special game state, the final selected music is clarified and the already selected music image is occupied by the already selected music for one special game state. You can prevent it from being done. In addition, for example, when the user reselects another song because he/she does not like the song that has been selected once, it is possible to prevent the disliked song from being displayed as the already selected song image, and at the same time, the reselected song can be displayed as the already selected song. This improves the convenience when making selections based on music images.

[Appendix E10]
The effect execution means (51) provisionally displays the upper limit number of already-selected music images (831) in the initial music selection image (83) to be first displayed on the image display means (341) in the order of newest selection date and time. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E7 to E9, characterized in that it is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image (832).

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix E10, in the music selection image that is displayed first, the already selected music image corresponding to the already selected music with the newest selection date and time is displayed at a position close to the provisionally selected music image. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find out the most recently selected already-selected music and can reselect the most recently selected music by the number of operations on the operating means. As a result, the player can enjoy the game while concentrating on the special game because the operation burden when reselecting the most recently selected song is reduced.

[Appendix E11]
The effect execution means (51) temporarily displays the upper limit number of already selected music images (831) in the initial music selection image (83) to be displayed first on the image display means (341) in descending order of selection frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E7 to E9, wherein the game machine is arranged and displayed at a position close to the selected music image.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E11, the already selected music image corresponding to the already selected music having a high selection frequency (for example, the number of selections or the selection rate within a predetermined number of times) is displayed at a position close to the provisionally selected music image. That is, the already-selected music image is displayed as reflecting the player's recent music selection tendency. Therefore, when the music selection image is displayed, the player can easily find out the recently selected already selected music and can select the recently selected music again with a small number of operations on the operation means. As a result, the player can enjoy the game while concentrating on the special game because the operation burden when selecting the recently selected song again is reduced.

[Appendix E12]
The effect execution means (51) causes the image display means (341) to display all of the upper limit number of already-selected music images (831) as those for different music. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix E12, since the already-selected music images do not include a plurality of images for the same music, even if an upper limit is set for the number of displayed already-selected music images, the music corresponding to the upper limit is displayed. Already-selected music images for the number of already-selected music are displayed. Therefore, when the player repeatedly selects the same song and wants to select an already-selected song other than that song, the player can easily find out the already-selected song that he/she wants to select. As a result, the player can reduce the operation burden when selecting the previously selected music again, and can enjoy the game while concentrating on the special game accordingly.

[Appendix E13]
If the number of already-selected music images (831) to be displayed on the image display means (341) is less than the upper limit, the shortage of the display number (for example, "1" to "3") with respect to the upper limit ), the unselected music image (833) is displayed as the music selection image (83) indicating the unselected music according to any one of appendices E7 to E12. .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E13, even when the number of already-selected music images to be displayed on the image display means is less than the upper limit, the unselected music images are displayed in place of the already-selected music images. Thus, the prescribed number of music selection images can be displayed on the image display means without excess or deficiency.

[Appendix E14]
The effect executing means (51)
An unselected music image (833) indicating the unselected music among the plurality of music is further displayed on the image display means (341) in an identifiable manner as the music selection image (83). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E13.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix E14, since the player can distinguish and recognize the selected music image that has been selected before and the unselected music image that has not been selected before, the unselected music image can be recognized. By operating the operation means while confirming, it is possible to provisionally select an unselected musical piece and display it as a provisionally selected musical piece image. Therefore, even when the player selects an unselected piece of music rather than an already selected piece of music, the player can select the unselected piece of music with a small number of operations on the operating means and output the unselected piece of music from the audio output means.

[Appendix E15]
When displaying the music selection image (83) on the image display means (341), the effect executing means (51) converts the temporarily selected music image (832) to the already selected music image (831) and the unselected music image (831). The gaming machine according to appendix E14, characterized in that it is displayed between the selected music image (833).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E15, both the already selected image and the unselected image are adjacent to the temporarily selected music image at least at the stage when the music selection image is first displayed on the image display means. Therefore, by changing the provisionally selected music image in the music selection image by operating the operation means, the player can select any of the selected music that has been selected before and the unselected music that has not been selected before. Even in the case of selecting music, the target music can be provisionally selected with a small number of operations. Therefore, the target music can be selected with a small number of operations, and the target music can be output from the audio output means.

[Appendix E16]
When the music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341), the effect execution means (51) selects the plurality of initial provisionally selected music pieces for the initial provisionally selected music image (832) to be displayed first. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E15, wherein selection is made from the unselected pieces of music among the pieces of music.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E16, the initial provisionally selected music is selected from the unselected music, and the initial provisionally selected music, which is the unselected music, is output from the audio output means. Therefore, even when the player finally selects a song from the already-selected songs, the player can listen to the unselected songs in the process up to that point, and the player can appreciate the goodness of the unselected songs. You can secure an opportunity to convey

[Appendix E17]
Depending on whether the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is the already selected music piece or the unselected piece of music, the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is reproduced from different parts of the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece by the voice. The game machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E16, characterized in that the output means (26) outputs.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E17, by performing a decision operation on the operation means in a state in which the unselected music is displayed as the temporarily selected music image, an unselected music that has not been selected before can be changed to an already selected music. It is possible to cause the audio output means to output a portion of the music that is different from the selected portion. As a result, the player can listen to the selected music from different parts depending on whether the already selected music is selected or the unselected music. It is possible to have a different way of enjoying the music from outputting the music.

[Appendix E18]
The effect execution means (51) causes the audio output means (26) to output from the beginning of the already selected music when the temporarily selected music is the already selected music. The game machine described.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix E18, the player can listen to the song from the start part when the provisionally selected song is the already selected song, while listening to the chorus when the provisionally selected song is the unselected song. You can listen to parts. Therefore, the player can enjoy the temporarily selected music from the beginning of the previously selected music. On the other hand, the player can listen to songs that have not been selected before, starting from the most exciting chorus part of the song. easier.

[Appendix E19]
The effect execution means (51) outputs the already-selected music from the beginning of the music to the audio output means (26) when the selected music is the already-selected music, and the selected music is the unselected music. The gaming machine according to appendix E17 or appendix E18, characterized in that, in some cases, the unselected music piece is output from the chorus portion to the sound output means (26).

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix E19, the player can listen from the start of the music when the selected music is the already selected music, and from the chorus when the selected music is the unselected music. can listen. Therefore, regarding the selected music, the player can enjoy the previously selected music from the start part. On the other hand, since the player can listen to songs that have not been selected before, starting with the chorus that has the highest excitement in the song, it is easy for the player to judge whether the currently selected song is to his liking. Become.

[Appendix E20]
The operation means (21) is operated by the player when performing settings related to the effect in the special game state,
further comprising display setting means (51) for performing display settings as to whether or not to display the already-selected music image (831) according to a setting operation by the player on the operation means (21),
The effect executing means (51)
A display setting screen that enables setting whether or not to display the already selected music image (831) on the display screen of the image display means (341) according to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. transition to (88,98),
When the display setting means (51) operates the operation means (21) when the display screen shifts to the display setting screen (88, 98), the setting operation is performed by the player. 2), the gaming machine according to any one of appendices E3 to E13, wherein the display setting is performed according to the setting contents set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E20, since it is possible to set whether or not to display the specific image included in the music selection image, it is possible to display the music selection image on the image display means in a display mode that matches the preferences of the player. can. As a result, the player can select a song to be output from the audio output means based on the song selection image in the display mode set by the player. Also, the player can select whether or not to display the already-selected music image in the music selection image. Therefore, when the music selection image includes the selected music image for the selected music selected in the past by the previous player, the player displays the music selection image that does not include the already selected music image. be able to.

[Appendix E21]
further comprising display setting storage means (512) capable of storing display setting history information relating to the display setting history for the display settings;
The effect executing means (51) stores the display setting memory means (512) as the display setting screens (88, 98) in the image display means (341) in response to the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. ) to the display setting history screen (88) displaying the setting history image (881) corresponding to the display setting history information stored in the
When the display screen is the display setting history screen (88), the display setting means (51) performs a setting operation for performing the display setting based on the display setting history image (881) by the player. , the gaming machine according to appendix E20, characterized in that the display setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E21, when the display screen of the image display means is the display setting history screen, the player can perform the same display settings as the past settings by performing setting operations on the operation means. can be done. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous settings, the player can perform desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E22]
The gaming machine according to appendix E21, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the display setting history image (881) including an image indicating a set time on the display setting history screen (88).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E22, by referring to the set time, the player can distinguish, for example, the display setting history of a previously playing player from the display setting history of the player himself/herself. When there is a display setting history to be selected in one's own display setting history, it becomes easier to have a chance of selecting the desired display setting history. Therefore, the player can perform desired display settings based on the display setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E23]
An output for setting output start from which of a plurality of predetermined output start portions according to a player's setting operation on the operation means (21) to start outputting the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece. Further comprising start setting means (51),
The effect execution means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an output start setting screen (87) that enables the output start setting in accordance with the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. , 97),
The output start setting means (51) sets the output start portion by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the output start setting screen (87, 97). The game according to any one of appendices E1 to E22, wherein when the operation is performed, the output start setting for the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is performed according to the setting content set by the player. machine.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E23, since the output start portion of the temporarily selected music or the selected music can be set, the temporarily selected music or the selected music can be output from the audio output means from the portion that matches the player's taste. can.

[Appendix E24]
The gaming machine according to appendix E23, wherein the plurality of output start portions include a music start portion and a chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E24, the player can cause the output of the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece to start from the beginning portion of the music piece or the chorus portion. Therefore, the player can start outputting the tentatively selected music or the selected music from the part that matches his or her taste. Here, the start part of the music or the chorus part is characteristic compared to other parts such as the B melody part of the music. Therefore, the player can select a portion to start outputting the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the start portion and the chorus portion of the music, so that the player can determine whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the previously selected music. It becomes easy to determine whether the music is one that has not been listened to or has not been listened to before.

[Appendix E25]
further comprising output start setting storage means (512) capable of storing output start setting history information relating to the output start setting history for the output start setting;
The effect execution means (51) stores the output start setting storage means as the output start setting screens (87, 97) in the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. to the output start setting history screen (87) displaying the output start setting history image (871) corresponding to the output start setting history information stored in (512);
When the display screen is the output start setting history screen (87), the output start setting means (51) is operated by the player to perform the output start setting based on the output start setting history image (871). The gaming machine according to appendix E23 or appendix E24, wherein the output start setting is performed according to the content set by the player when the game is set.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix E25, when the display screen of the image display means is the output start setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation means, thereby outputting the same content as the past output start setting. Can be set to start. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform the desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix E26]
The gaming machine according to appendix E25, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the output start setting history image (871) including an image indicating a set time on the output start setting history screen (87). .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix E26, by referring to the set time, the player can distinguish, for example, the output start setting history of a player who has played before and the output start setting history of himself/herself. In addition, when there is an output start setting history to be selected in the output start setting history of oneself, it becomes easier to predict the case of selecting the desired output start setting history. Therefore, the player can perform a desired output start setting based on the output start setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operation means.

[Appendix F1]
main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
production means (26, 341, etc.) including image display means (341) for executing production with images and audio output means (26) for executing production for outputting music;
A music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the sound output means (26) from a plurality of music, and based on the music selection image (83). effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26);
operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a song to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the song selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
with
The effect executing means (51)
The song selection image (83) indicates that the song is a temporarily selected song that can be selected by the player's decision operation on the operation means (21) for selecting at least a song to be output by the audio output means (26). displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) on the image display means (341);
changing the temporarily selected music image (832) in the music selection image (83) in accordance with the player's operation on the operation means (21);
When the temporarily selected music image (832) is displayed on the image display means (341), the temporarily selected music is output to the audio output means (26), and the temporarily selected music is selected when the decision operation is performed. causing the audio output means (26) to output the music that has been played as a selected music,
causing the audio output means (26) to start outputting the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from a first portion of a plurality of predetermined output start portions;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effecting means, the plurality of the above-mentioned voice output means (26) is output to the voice output means (26). A game machine characterized in that the output of the provisionally selected music piece or the selected music piece is started from a second portion different from the first portion of the output start portion of the above.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the first portion, but in a game situation in which the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the second portion different from the first portion. That is, the player can play a game in which the current game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means by outputting the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the second part different from the first part. You can find out what the situation is. Therefore, the operation for provisionally selecting or selecting a song is not simply the act of provisionally selecting or selecting a song, but the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means. It can be enjoyed as an act to confirm whether or not there is. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to positively provisionally select or select a song, and to encourage the player to actively participate in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and increasing interest in the special game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

[Appendix F2]
Said game state includes a first game state, a second game state in which the probability of being determined by said main control means (41) to shift said game state to said special game state is higher than said first game state, including the special game state,
The special game state includes a first special game state in which the game state is shifted to the first game state after the special game state is finished, and a special game state in which the game state is changed to the second game state after the special game state is finished. Including the second special game state to be transferred,
The effect execution means (51) performs the provisional selection of music on condition that the game state suggested by the effect means is the first special game state and the actual game state is the second special game state. Alternatively, the game machine according to appendix F1, wherein the selected music is output from the second portion to the audio output means (26).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special game state, the selected music is output from the second part. That is, when the player selects a song, the selected song is output from the second part, so that the current special game state is the second special game state more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. You can get to know. Therefore, the decision operation for selecting a song is not simply an act of selecting a song, but an act of confirming whether the second special game state is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. can be done. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to positively select music, and to encourage the player to actively participate in the special game.

[Appendix F3]
The effect executing means (51) selects the provisionally selected music or the selected music from among the plurality of music as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to appendix F1 or appendix F2, wherein the audio output means (26) is caused to output the tentatively selected song or the selected song from the second portion on condition that the song is an unselected song other than a song. .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F3, the selected music is output from the second portion on condition that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the unselected music in the second special game state. That is, when the player temporarily selects or selects an unselected music piece, the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece is output from the second part, so that the actual game situation is more realistic than the game situation suggested by the effect means. It is possible to easily know that the game situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the operation for provisionally selecting or selecting a song can be enjoyed not only as an act of provisionally selecting or selecting a song, but as an act of confirming whether the game situation is advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can be motivated to actively provisionally select or select the unselected music to listen to the unselected music, and the opportunity to tell the player about the goodness of the unselected music can be ensured.

[Appendix F4]
When the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the unselected music, the first part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a chorus part, and the second part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is The gaming machine according to appendix F3, characterized by being the beginning of a piece of music.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F4, while the first part is the chorus part, the second part is the start part of the music that is clearly different from the first part, so that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second part. When output from the part, it is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means. As a result, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix F5]
When the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the unselected music, the first part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a music start part, and the second part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the chorus portion.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F5, while the first part is the beginning part of the music, the second part is the chorus part that is clearly different from the first part. When output from the part, it is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means. As a result, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix F6]
The effect executing means (51), on the condition that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a previously selected music that has already been selected by the player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26), The gaming machine according to appendix F1 or appendix F2, wherein the audio output means (26) is caused to output the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second portion.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F6, even when the already selected music is provisionally selected or selected, the provisionally selected music or the selected music is output from the second portion. That is, when the player temporarily selects or selects the already-selected music, the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the second part, so that the actual game situation is more likely to be played than the game situation suggested by the effect means. It is possible to easily know that the game situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the operation for temporarily selecting or selecting an unselected song can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether the game situation is advantageous to the player, rather than simply selecting a song.

[Appendix F7]
When the temporarily selected music is the already selected music, the first part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a music start part, and the second part of the temporarily selected music or the selected music is a chorus part The gaming machine according to appendix F6, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F7, the first part is the start part of the music, and the second part is the chorus part that is clearly different from the first part, so that the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second part. When output from the part, it is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means. As a result, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix F8]
When the selected music is the already selected music, the first part of the selected music is a continuation part of the temporarily selected music output from the audio output means (26) at the timing when the decision operation is performed. The gaming machine according to appendix F6, wherein the second portion of the selected music is a chorus portion or a beginning portion of the music.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F8, while the first part is the continuation part of the selected song, the second part is the chorus part or the start part of the song that is clearly different from the first part, so that the selected song is When output from the second part, it is possible to give the player a clear sense of discomfort. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means. As a result, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix F9]
The effect executing means (51) provides an initial provisional selection for first displaying the temporarily selected music image (832) when the temporarily selected music causes the music selection image (83) to be displayed on the image display means (341). Any one of additional notes F1 to F8, characterized in that the temporarily selected music is output from the second portion to the audio output means (26) on condition that the music is the initially temporarily selected music for the music image (832). The gaming machine described in .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F9, even if the player does not perform any operation on the operation means, the initial provisionally selected music is output from the second portion when the music selection image is displayed on the image display means. can be Therefore, even a player who does not make a temporary selection or selection of music can be informed that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the presentation means.

[Appendix F10]
The special game state includes the third special game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R probability variable jackpot game state), and the fourth special game state (16R probability variable jackpot game state) whose playing time is longer than the third special game state. including
The effect executing means (51)
causing the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music or the selected music from the first portion in the third special game state;
In the fourth special game state, the tentatively-selected music piece on the condition that a suggestive effect suggesting that the third special game state is being executed as the effect to be executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.) Alternatively, the game machine according to appendix F1, wherein the selected music is output from the second portion to the audio output means (26).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F10, on the condition that the suggestive effect suggesting that the third special game state is being executed in the fourth special game state, the temporarily selected music or the selected music is the second part. output from That is, the player can determine that the current special game state is the fourth special game state having a longer playing time than the third special game state by outputting the provisionally selected music or the selected music from the second part. It is possible to know that the expected value of the game value that can be obtained is high. Therefore, the player can enjoy the act of temporarily selecting or selecting a song as the act of confirming whether or not it is in the fourth special game state in which the expected value of the game value that can be obtained is higher than in the third special game state. can.

[Appendix F11]
When the game state is the fourth special game state, the temporarily selected music or the first part of the selected music is the music start part, and the temporarily selected music or the second part of the selected music is the chorus part. The gaming machine according to appendix F10, characterized by:

[Appendix F12]
The gaming machine according to appendix F10 or appendix F11, wherein when the game state is the third special game state, the first part of the temporarily selected music is a chorus part.

[Appendix F13]
When the game state is the third special game state, the first part of the selected music piece is a continuation part of the part output from the voice output means (26) at the timing when the decision operation is performed. The gaming machine according to appendix F10 or appendix F11, characterized by:

According to the gaming machine according to notes F11 to 13, in the fourth special game state, the first part of the temporarily selected song or the selected song is the song start part, while the second part of the temporarily selected song or the selected song is Since the chorus part is clearly different from the first part, it is possible to give the player a distinct sense of incompatibility when the temporarily selected song or the selected song is output from the second part. Thus, the player can easily know that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means. As a result, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix F14]
The effect execution means (51) determines whether or not to output the selected music from the second portion by a lottery triggered by the decision operation by the player on the operation means. to F13.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F14, the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means (for example, the normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) game state) (for example, the probability variable jackpot game state) ), the contradiction of the output start portion of the selected music can be generated by simple control such as lottery by the decision operation for selecting the music.

[Appendix F15]
The gaming machine according to appendix F14, wherein the number of lotteries is set to a predetermined upper limit for one execution of the special game.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F15, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily and repeatedly selecting a song in one special game.

[Appendix F16]
The effect executing means (51)
Enables selection of music to be output by the audio output means (26) within a predetermined selection valid period in the special game state,
It is scheduled to execute a promotion effect after the selection valid period, which indicates that the actual game situation is more advantageous to the player than the game situation suggested by the effect means. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F15, wherein the condition is to cause the audio output means (26) to output the temporarily selected music piece or the selected music piece from the second portion.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix F16, when a song is provisionally selected or selected within the selection validity period, the provisionally selected song or the selected song is output from the second part, thereby indicating that the effect is indicated by the effect means. It is possible to know in advance that a promotion presentation will be executed to clarify that the actual game situation is a game situation more advantageous to the player than the game situation. Therefore, the player can enjoy the provisional selection or selection of music by paying attention to whether the temporarily selected music or the selected music is output from the first portion or the second portion.

[Appendix G1]
main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
production means (26, 341, etc.) including image display means (341) for executing production with images and audio output means (26) for executing production for outputting music;
A music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the sound output means (26) from a plurality of music, and based on the music selection image (83). effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26);
operation means (21) operated by the player when selecting a song to be output by the audio output means (26) based on the song selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
with
The effect execution means (51) performs a music selection operation that suggests or indicates the game state on condition that the player performs a decision operation on the operation means (21) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that productions (suggestive productions 1 to 8, fixed productions 1 to 4) are executed by the production means (26, 341, etc.).

According to the gaming machine pertaining to Appendix G1, the music selection operation presentation that suggests or indicates the game state is executed by the player's decision operation on the operation means for selecting music. Therefore, the player can enjoy the deciding operation for selecting music as an act for confirming the game state based on the music selection operation performance, not as an act of simply selecting a music. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to actively select music, and to encourage the player to actively participate in the special game.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and increasing interest in the special game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

[Appendix G2]
The special game state includes a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state), and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state, 16R probability variable jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. ), including
The music selection operation effect is an expectation degree suggesting effect (suggestion effect 1 to suggestion effect 8) that suggests the degree of expectation that the game state is the second game state, or the game state is the second game state. The gaming machine according to appendix G1, characterized in that it is a fixed effect (fixed effects 1 to 4) that clearly indicates that.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix G2, the expectation degree suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the game state is the second special game state, or the confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the game state is the second special game state. By performing the setting to be executed, the player's decision operation on the operation means for selecting a song causes the expectation level suggesting effect or the confirmation effect to be executed. Therefore, the decision operation for selecting a song is not simply an act of selecting a song, but an act of confirming the expectation of being in the second special game state based on the expectation suggesting effect or the confirmed effect. can be enjoyed as
On the other hand, by setting the expectation degree suggesting effect or the confirmed effect not to be executed, the expectation degree suggesting effect or the confirmed effect is not executed even if the decision operation is performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special game while anticipating that the game state is the second special game state without worrying about the content of the music selection operation presentation.

[Appendix G3]
The effect execution means (51) performs the above-mentioned performance on the condition that the selected music is an unselected music other than the selected music that has already been selected by the player as a music to be output by the audio output means (26). The gaming machine according to appendix G1 or appendix G2, characterized in that a music selection operation effect (suggestive effect 1 to suggestive effect 8, confirmation effect 1 to 4) is executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G3, the music selection operation effect is executed on the condition that an unselected music is selected. You can select a selection song. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to listen to a wide variety of songs prepared in advance to be output in the special game state.

[Appendix G4]
The effect execution means (51) performs the effect execution means (26 , 341, etc.) to execute the music selection operation effect.

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix G4, when selecting a song, the degree of expectation that the game state is the second special game state when the player repeatedly hits or presses and holds the operation means. A music selection operation effect such as an expectation level suggesting effect suggesting is executed. Therefore, the action of selecting a song is not limited to simply selecting a song, and the expectation level of being in the second special game state etc. is displayed based on the music selection operation effect such as the expectation level suggesting effect by performing a continuous hitting operation or a long press operation. You can also enjoy it as an act to confirm. As a result, the player can be made to actively select music.

[Appendix G5]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20),
The effect executing means (51)
An instruction image (84) for instructing the first operation means (21) as the operation means (20, 21) to be operated by the player to select a song from the music selection image (83) is provided in the music selection image (83). (83) and displayed on the image display means (341),
On condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the decision operation is performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84), the effect means executes the music selection operation effect. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G3, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine pertaining to appendix G5, it is expected that the game state will be the second special game state by performing a decision operation on an operation means different from the operation means instructed to select a song. A music selection operation effect such as an expectation degree suggesting effect suggesting a degree is executed. Therefore, the act of selecting music is not limited to music selection, and the second special game state is achieved based on the music selection operation performance such as the expectation level suggesting performance by performing an operation for an operation means different from the instructed operation means. It can also be enjoyed as an act to check the degree of expectation of things. As a result, the player can be made to actively select music.

[Appendix G6]
The effect executing means (51) performs the music selection operation effect (suggestion effect 1 to The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G5, characterized in that the suggestive effect 8 and the fixed effects 1 to 4) are executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G6, since a music selection operation effect such as an expectation level suggesting effect is executed by performing a decision operation for music selection during a predetermined period, music selection can be performed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. It is possible to suppress unnecessary repetition of music selection for checking whether or not an operation effect is to be executed.

[Appendix G7]
The effect execution means (51) performs the music selection operation effect (suggestion effect 1 to suggestion effect 8) when the number of times the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. , fixed effects 1 to 4) are executed by the effect means (26, 341, etc.).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G7, since the music selection operation effect is executed when the number of times the determination operation for selecting music is performed is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times, the selected music is not fully listened to. It is possible to suppress unnecessary repetition of music selection for checking whether or not the selection operation presentation is to be executed.

[Appendix G8]
The operation means (21) is operated by the player when performing settings related to the effect in the special game state,
Further comprising an effect execution setting means (51) for performing effect execution setting for causing the effect means (341 etc.) to execute the music selection operation effect,
The effect execution means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting in accordance with the player's operation of the operation means (21). , 99),
The effect execution setting means (51) performs an operation of performing the effect execution setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89, 99). , the game machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G7, wherein the effect execution setting for the music selection operation effect is performed according to the setting contents set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G8, since it is possible to set whether or not to execute the music selection operation effect, the music selection operation effect can be executed according to the taste of the player. As a result, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a way that suits him/herself.

[Appendix G9]
Further comprising an effect execution setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information regarding the effect execution setting history for the effect execution setting,
The effect execution means (51) stores the effect execution setting storage means as the effect execution setting screens (89, 99) in the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. (512) to shift to the production execution setting history screen (89) displaying the setting history image (891) corresponding to the production execution setting history information stored in (512),
The effect execution setting means (51) performs a setting operation for performing the effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history image (891) by the player when the display screen is the effect execution setting history screen (89). is performed, the game machine according to appendix G8 is characterized in that the effect execution setting of the content set by the player is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G9, when the display screen of the image display means is the effect execution setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation means, thereby displaying the same effect as the past effect execution setting. Run settings can be configured. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform the desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operating means.

[Appendix G10]
The game machine according to appendix G9, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image indicating a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89). .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix G10, by referring to the set time, the player can, for example, distinguish between the effect execution setting history of a player who has played before and the effect execution setting history of the player himself/herself. Also, when there is a performance execution setting history to be selected in the performance execution setting history of oneself, it becomes easier to predict the selection of the desired performance execution setting history. Therefore, the player can perform desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operating means.

[Appendix H1]
main control means (41) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
a game execution means (37) for executing a game according to the determination result of the main control means (41);
reservation means (41) for withholding the right to execute a game by the game execution means (37) up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Suspension storage means (412) for storing the determination result of the suspended game suspended by the suspension means (41);
production means (26, 341, etc.) including image display means (341) for executing production with images and audio output means (26) for executing production for outputting music;
A music selection image (83) is displayed on the image display means (341) for allowing the player to select a music to be output by the sound output means (26) from a plurality of music, and based on the music selection image (83). effect execution means (51) for outputting the music selected by the player to the audio output means (26);
operation means (21) operated by a player when selecting a song from the song selection image (83) displayed by the image display means (341);
with
The effect executing means (51) includes a determination result for the reserved game stored in the reserved storage means (412) that shifts the game state to the special game state after execution of the reserved game. In this case, on the condition that the player performs a decision operation on the operating means (21), the judgment result for the pending game stored in the pending storage means (412) is included after the execution of the pending game. It is characterized by causing the effect means (26, 341, etc.) to execute a special effect (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4) that suggests or indicates that the game state is shifted to the special game state. game machine.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H1, the game state is shifted to the special game state after the execution of the pending game by the player's decision operation on the operation means for selecting a song, so-called pending consecutive games. The special effects shown can be executed. Therefore, the decision operation for selecting music can be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not the reservation will be executed based on the special performance, rather than simply selecting a music. As a result, the player can be made to actively select music.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and increasing interest in the special game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

[Appendix H2]
The effect execution means (51) performs the effect execution means (26 , 341, etc.) to execute the special effects (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H2, when a song is selected, the game state is changed to the special game state after the execution of the holding game by performing a continuous hitting operation or a long pressing operation on the operation means by the player. A special effect indicating that a so-called reservation renso will be performed can be executed. Therefore, the act of selecting music is not limited to simply selecting music, but can also be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not Suspension Renso will be executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be made to actively select music.

[Appendix H3]
The operating means (21) includes a first operating means (21) and a second operating means (20),
The effect executing means (51)
An instruction image (84) for instructing the first operation means (21) as the operation means (20, 21) to be operated by the player to select a song from the music selection image (83) is provided in the music selection image (83). (83) and displayed on the image display means (341),
On condition that the operation means (20, 21) on which the decision operation is performed is the second operation means (20) different from the instruction image (84), the effect means executes the music selection operation effect. The gaming machine according to appendix H1 or appendix H2, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H3, when a decision operation is performed on an operation means different from the operation means instructed to select a song, the game state is changed to the special mode after execution of the pending game. A special effect indicating that a so-called reservation series is performed, which is to shift to a game state, can be executed. Therefore, the act of selecting music is not limited to simply selecting music, but can also be enjoyed as an act of confirming whether or not Suspension Renso will be executed based on a special effect. As a result, the player can be made to actively select music. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the special game and increasing interest in the special game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

[Appendix H4]
The effect execution means (51) causes the effect means (26, 341, etc.) to execute the special effects (fixed effect 2 and fixed effect 4) on condition that the selected music is the unselected music. A game machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H3 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H4, the special effect is executed on the condition that the unselected music is selected. can be selected. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to listen to a wide variety of songs prepared in advance to be output in the special game state.

[Appendix H5]
The effect execution means (51) performs the special effect on the condition that the decision operation is performed on the operation means (21) during a predetermined period of time in the special game state. 26, 341, etc.).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H5, the special effect is executed on the condition that the decision operation for selecting the music is performed within the predetermined period, so the special effect is executed without sufficiently listening to the selected music. It is possible to suppress unnecessary repetition of song selection for confirmation of whether or not a song is selected.

[Appendix H6]
The effect execution means (51) performs the special effect on the condition that the number of times the determination operation is performed on the operation means (21) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. , 341, etc.).

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H6, since the special effect is executed on the condition that the number of times the decision operation for selecting a song is performed is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the selected song is not fully listened to. , it is possible to suppress unnecessary repetition of music selection for confirmation of whether or not special effects are to be executed.

[Appendix H7]
The operation means (21) is operated by the player when performing settings related to the effect in the special game state,
Further comprising an effect execution setting means (51) for performing effect execution setting whether the special effect is executed by the effect means (341 etc.),
The effect execution means (51) changes the display screen of the image display means (341) to an effect execution setting screen (89) that enables the effect execution setting in accordance with the player's operation of the operation means (21). , 99),
The effect execution setting means (51) performs an operation of performing the effect execution setting by the player by operating the operation means (21) when the display screen is the effect execution setting screen (89, 99). is performed, the game machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H6, wherein the effect execution setting for the special effect is performed according to the setting contents set by the player.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H7, since it is possible to set whether or not to execute the special effect, it is possible to execute the special effect according to the taste of the player. As a result, the player can enjoy the music selection operation in the special game in a way that suits him/herself.

[Appendix H8]
Further comprising production execution setting storage means (512) capable of storing setting history information related to the setting history for the production execution setting,
The effect execution means (51) stores the effect execution setting storage means as the effect execution setting screens (89, 99) in the image display means (341) in accordance with the operation of the operation means (21) by the player. (512) to shift to the effect execution setting history screen (89) displaying the setting history image (891) corresponding to the setting history information stored in (512),
The effect execution setting means (51), when the display screen shifts to the effect execution setting history screen (89), the setting operation of performing the effect execution setting based on the setting history image (891) by the player. The gaming machine according to appendix H7, characterized in that the effect execution setting of the content set by the player is performed when the game is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H8, when the display screen of the image display means is the effect execution setting history screen, the player performs a setting operation on the operation means, thereby displaying the same effect as the past effect execution setting. Run settings can be configured. Therefore, when the player wants to return to the previous setting, the player can perform the desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operating means.

[Appendix H9]
The gaming machine according to appendix H8, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the effect execution setting history image (891) including an image indicating a set time on the effect execution setting history screen (89). .

According to the gaming machine according to appendix H9, by referring to the set time, the player can, for example, distinguish between the effect execution setting history of a player who has played before and the effect execution setting history of the player himself/herself. Also, when there is a performance execution setting history to be selected in the performance execution setting history of oneself, it becomes easier to predict the selection of the desired performance execution setting history. Therefore, the player can perform desired effect execution setting based on the effect execution setting history screen with a small number of operations on the operating means.

10: Game machine 20: Operation button 20a: Operation switch 21: Selection determination unit 21A: Selection button 211: Up selection button 212: Down selection button 213: Left selection button 214: Right selection button 211a to 211d: Selection operation switch 21B: Decide button 21Ba: Decide operation switch 26: Speaker 331: Main control unit 332: Sub control unit 341: Pattern display unit 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Audio lamp controller 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 61: MPU
611: ROM
612: RAM
83: Music selection image 831: Already selected music image 832: Temporarily selected music image 833: Unselected music image 834: Unselected music image

Claims (1)

main control means for determining whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition;
production means including image display means for executing production with images and audio output means for executing production for outputting music;
A song selection image is displayed on the image display means for allowing the player to select a song to be output by the sound output means from a plurality of songs, and the song selected by the player based on the song selection image is output as the sound. production execution means for causing the means to output;
operation means operated by the player when selecting a song to be output by the audio output means based on the song selection image displayed by the image display means;
with
The effect execution means provides the effect means with a music selection operation effect that suggests or indicates the game state on the condition that the player performs a decision operation on the operation means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by executing.

Images